Add size to bar in ld-gc/pr20022a.s
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
2571583a 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
36@set Renesas
37@set SPU
38@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 39@set WIN32
e0001a05 40@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
41@end ifset
42@c man end
43
9160ea82
AM
44@ifnottex
45@dircategory Software development
46@direntry
252b5132 47* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
48@end direntry
49@end ifnottex
252b5132 50
0e9517a9 51@copying
e49e529d
JM
52This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55@end ifset
56version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 57
2571583a 58Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
2571583a 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 96
0285c67d 97Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 98under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
99or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 102section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 103@c man end
252b5132 104
252b5132
RH
105@end titlepage
106@end iftex
4ecceb71 107@contents
252b5132
RH
108@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
84ec0e6d 110@ifnottex
252b5132 111@node Top
71ba23f6 112@top LD
e49e529d
JM
113This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116@end ifset
117version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 118
cf055d54 119This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
120Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 122
252b5132
RH
123@menu
124* Overview:: Overview
125* Invocation:: Invocation
126* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127@ifset GENERIC
128* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129@end ifset
130@ifclear GENERIC
131@ifset H8300
132* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
134@ifset Renesas
135* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
136@end ifset
137@ifset I960
138* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
140@ifset ARM
141* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
143@ifset M68HC11
144* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
146@ifset HPPA
147* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
149@ifset M68K
150* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151@end ifset
833794fc
MR
152@ifset MIPS
153* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
155@ifset POWERPC
156* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157@end ifset
158@ifset POWERPC64
159* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
161@ifset SPU
162* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
164@ifset TICOFF
165* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
167@ifset WIN32
168* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
170@ifset XTENSA
171* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172@end ifset
252b5132
RH
173@end ifclear
174@ifclear SingleFormat
175* BFD:: BFD
176@end ifclear
177@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 181* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 182* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 183@end menu
84ec0e6d 184@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
185
186@node Overview
187@chapter Overview
188
189@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 191
0879a67a 192@ifset man
0285c67d 193@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 194ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
195@c man end
196
197@c man begin SEEALSO
198ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200@file{ld}.
201@c man end
202@end ifset
203
204@c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
ff5dcc92 206@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 207their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 208compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 209
ff5dcc92 210@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
211a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
0285c67d
NC
214@ifset man
215@c For the man only
ece2d90e 216This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
217@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
219@end ifset
220
252b5132 221@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
222This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
224write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227@end ifclear
228
229Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 232@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
233(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
0285c67d
NC
235@c man end
236
252b5132
RH
237@node Invocation
238@chapter Invocation
239
0285c67d
NC
240@c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
ff5dcc92 242The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
243and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
0285c67d
NC
246@c man end
247
252b5132
RH
248@ifset UsesEnvVars
249@menu
250* Options:: Command Line Options
251* Environment:: Environment Variables
252@end menu
253
254@node Options
255@section Command Line Options
256@end ifset
257
258@cindex command line
259@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
260
261@c man begin OPTIONS
262
252b5132
RH
263The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 266For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
267object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270@smallexample
271ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272@end smallexample
273
ff5dcc92 274This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
275result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
ff5dcc92 279Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
280point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
285occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287noted in the descriptions below.
288
289@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
290Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
294
295Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299message @samp{No input files}.
300
36f63dca 301If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
302assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
307@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
312
313For options whose names are a single letter,
314option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316option that requires them.
317
318For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 319precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 320@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 321this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 322only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
323@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325output.
326
327Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332accepted.
252b5132 333
36f63dca
NC
334Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
336prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
338
339@smallexample
2509a395 340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
341@end smallexample
342
343This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
344silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351@smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
354
355Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356linker:
357
ff5dcc92 358@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 359@include at-file.texi
dff70155 360
2509a395
SL
361@kindex -a @var{keyword}
362@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
363This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
7ee314fa
AM
369@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 376it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 377This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 378interface.
7ee314fa 379
252b5132
RH
380@ifset I960
381@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
382@kindex -A @var{arch}
383@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
384@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
386In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
388@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 390archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
391family}, for details.
392
ff5dcc92 393Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
394other architecture families.
395@end ifset
396
397@ifclear SingleFormat
398@cindex binary input format
399@kindex -b @var{format}
400@kindex --format=@var{format}
401@cindex input format
402@cindex input format
403@item -b @var{input-format}
404@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
405@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 407@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 408that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 409configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 410to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
411default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415@xref{BFD}.
416
417You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419linking object files of different formats), by including
420@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 421particular format.
252b5132
RH
422
423The default format is taken from the environment variable
424@code{GNUTARGET}.
425@ifset UsesEnvVars
426@xref{Environment}.
427@end ifset
428You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
429@code{TARGET};
430@ifclear man
431see @ref{Format Commands}.
432@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
433@end ifclear
434
435@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437@cindex compatibility, MRI
438@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 440For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 441files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
442@ifclear man
443@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444@end ifclear
445@ifset man
446the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447@end ifset
448Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 449the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
450scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
452specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454@cindex common allocation
455@kindex -d
456@kindex -dc
457@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 458@item -d
252b5132
RH
459@itemx -dc
460@itemx -dp
461These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
7ee314fa
AM
467@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 476The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 477
252b5132
RH
478@cindex entry point, from command line
479@kindex -e @var{entry}
480@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 481@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
482@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
b58f81ae
DJ
491@kindex --exclude-libs
492@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 494exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
495@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500be treated as hidden.
501
e1c37eb5
DK
502@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513regardless of this option.
514
252b5132
RH
515@cindex dynamic symbol table
516@kindex -E
517@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 518@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
519@item -E
520@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
521@itemx --no-export-dynamic
522When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
531
532If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535linking the program itself.
536
55255dae 537You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 538be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 539See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 540
8b747e1a
DK
541Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
36f63dca 545@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
546@cindex big-endian objects
547@cindex endianness
548@kindex -EB
549@item -EB
550Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552@cindex little-endian objects
553@kindex -EL
554@item -EL
555Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 556@end ifclear
252b5132 557
2509a395
SL
558@kindex -f @var{name}
559@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560@item -f @var{name}
561@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
562When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575machine specific performance.
576
577This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
2509a395
SL
580@kindex -F @var{name}
581@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 582@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 583@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
584When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595@var{name}.
596
ff5dcc92 597Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 598toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
599object files.
600@ifclear SingleFormat
601The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 602@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 603@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
604environment variable.
605@end ifclear
606The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 608
3dbf70a2 609@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
610@kindex -fini=@var{name}
611@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
612When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615the function to call.
616
252b5132
RH
617@kindex -g
618@item -g
619Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
2509a395
SL
621@kindex -G @var{value}
622@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 623@cindex object size
2509a395 624@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
625@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 628MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
629sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 632@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 633@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 634@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
635@itemx -soname=@var{name}
636When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642@kindex -i
643@cindex incremental link
644@item -i
645Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
3dbf70a2 647@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
648@kindex -init=@var{name}
649@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
650When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653function to call.
654
252b5132 655@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 656@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 657@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 658@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
659@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 663will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 664will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 665
ff5dcc92 666On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
667files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
674
675The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
ff5dcc92 682See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
683archives multiple times.
684
685You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687@ifset GENERIC
688This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 689if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
690behaviour of the AIX linker.
691@end ifset
692
693@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 694@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 695@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 696@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 697@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
698Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
700option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 703@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
704order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706option is specified.
252b5132 707
3aa2d05a
NC
708If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
709prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
710@samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 711
252b5132
RH
712@ifset UsesEnvVars
713The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 714@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
715some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716@end ifset
717
718The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722@cindex emulation
723@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 724@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
725Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732configured.
733
734@cindex link map
735@kindex -M
736@kindex --print-map
737@item -M
738@itemx --print-map
739Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740information about the link, including the following:
741
742@itemize @bullet
743@item
3b83e13a 744Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
745@item
746How common symbols are allocated.
747@item
748All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
750@item
751The values assigned to symbols.
752
753Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759linker script containing:
760
761@smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765@end smallexample
766
767will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768option is used:
769
770@smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774@end smallexample
775
776See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777scripts.
252b5132
RH
778@end itemize
779
780@kindex -n
781@cindex read-only text
782@cindex NMAGIC
783@kindex --nmagic
784@item -n
785@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
786Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
789
790@kindex -N
791@kindex --omagic
792@cindex read/write from cmd line
793@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 794@item -N
252b5132
RH
795@itemx --omagic
796Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
797not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
799mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
802
803@kindex --no-omagic
804@cindex OMAGIC
805@item --no-omagic
806This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
810
811@kindex -o @var{output}
812@kindex --output=@var{output}
813@cindex naming the output file
814@item -o @var{output}
815@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 816Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
817option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820@kindex -O @var{level}
821@cindex generating optimized output
822@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 823If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 824the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
825should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 830
387dd777
DP
831@kindex -plugin @var{name}
832@item -plugin @var{name}
833Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
834the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
835automatically added by the complier, when using link time
836optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
837wish.
838
839Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
840from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
841@command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
842those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
843copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
844based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
845just copy in the newest one.
846
26278bb8
UD
847@kindex --push-state
848@cindex push state governing input file handling
849@item --push-state
850The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
851flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
852restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
853
854The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
855@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
856@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
857@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
858@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
859@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
860
861One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
862used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
863listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
864something as follows:
865
866@smallexample
867-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
868@end smallexample
869
870@kindex --pop-state
871@cindex pop state governing input file handling
67cecaba 872@item --pop-state
26278bb8
UD
873Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
874flags governing input file handling.
875
a712da20
NC
876@kindex -q
877@kindex --emit-relocs
878@cindex retain relocations in final executable
879@item -q
880@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 881Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
882Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
883order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
884in larger executables.
885
dbab7a7b
NC
886This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
887
4f471f39
RS
888@kindex --force-dynamic
889@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
890@item --force-dynamic
891Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
892to VxWorks targets.
893
252b5132
RH
894@cindex partial link
895@cindex relocatable output
896@kindex -r
1049f94e 897@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 898@item -r
1049f94e 899@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 900Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 901turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
902linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
903magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
904@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 905@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
906If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
907linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
908constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
909
62bf86b4
HPN
910When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
911partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
912relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
913example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
914with input files in other formats at all.
915
252b5132
RH
916This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
917
918@kindex -R @var{file}
919@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
920@cindex symbol-only input
921@item -R @var{filename}
922@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
923Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
924relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
925to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
926programs. You may use this option more than once.
927
ff5dcc92 928For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 929followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 930the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
931
932@kindex -s
933@kindex --strip-all
934@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 935@item -s
252b5132
RH
936@itemx --strip-all
937Omit all symbol information from the output file.
938
939@kindex -S
940@kindex --strip-debug
941@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 942@item -S
252b5132
RH
943@itemx --strip-debug
944Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
945
a70f34c0
NC
946@kindex --strip-discarded
947@kindex --no-strip-discarded
948@item --strip-discarded
949@itemx --no-strip-discarded
950Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
951Enabled by default.
952
252b5132
RH
953@kindex -t
954@kindex --trace
955@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 956@item -t
252b5132 957@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 958Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
959
960@kindex -T @var{script}
961@kindex --script=@var{script}
962@cindex script files
963@item -T @var{scriptfile}
964@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
965Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 966@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 967@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
968output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
969the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
970specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
971options accumulate.
252b5132 972
14be8564
L
973@kindex -dT @var{script}
974@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
975@cindex script files
976@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
977@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
978Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
979
980This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
981processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
982command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
983@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
984behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
985command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
986the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
987@samp{gcc}).
988
252b5132
RH
989@kindex -u @var{symbol}
990@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
991@cindex undefined symbol
992@item -u @var{symbol}
993@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
994Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
995symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
996modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
997different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
998option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
999
0a618243
AB
1000If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1001into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1002undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1003instead.
1004
1005@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1006@cindex symbols, require defined
1007@cindex defined symbol
1008@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1009Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1010is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1011is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1012and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1013@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1014can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1015
252b5132
RH
1016@kindex -Ur
1017@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 1018@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
1019For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1020@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 1021turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
1022@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1023It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1024with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1025be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1026@samp{-r} for the others.
1027
c005eb9e
AB
1028@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1029@cindex orphan sections
1030@cindex sections, orphan
1031@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1032Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1033specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1034
1035@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1036
1037@table @code
1038@item place
1039Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1040the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
d2732b69 1041@samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
c005eb9e
AB
1042
1043@item discard
1044All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1045@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1046
1047@item warn
1048The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1049issue a warning.
1050
1051@item error
1052The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1053@end table
1054
1055The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1056
577a0623
AM
1057@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1058@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1059Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1060@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1061missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1062specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1063multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1064input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1065in a linker script.
a854a4a7 1066
252b5132
RH
1067@kindex -v
1068@kindex -V
1069@kindex --version
1070@cindex version
1071@item -v
1072@itemx --version
1073@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1074Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1075lists the supported emulations.
1076
1077@kindex -x
1078@kindex --discard-all
1079@cindex deleting local symbols
1080@item -x
1081@itemx --discard-all
1082Delete all local symbols.
1083
1084@kindex -X
1085@kindex --discard-locals
1086@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1087@item -X
252b5132 1088@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1089Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1090system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1091or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1092
1093@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1094@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1095@cindex symbol tracing
1096@item -y @var{symbol}
1097@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1098Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1099option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1100to prepend an underscore.
1101
1102This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1103don't know where the reference is coming from.
1104
1105@kindex -Y @var{path}
1106@item -Y @var{path}
1107Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1108for Solaris compatibility.
1109
1110@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1111@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1112The recognized keywords are:
1113@table @samp
1114
1115@item combreloc
1116Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1117lookup caching possible.
1118
b8871f35
L
1119@item common
1120Generate common symbols with the STT_COMMON type druing a relocatable
1121link.
1122
cd6d6c15 1123@item defs
560e09e9 1124Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1125shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1126
6aa29e7b
JJ
1127@item execstack
1128Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1129
b039ef04
L
1130@item global
1131This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1132the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1133of subsequently loaded libraries.
1134
cd6d6c15
NC
1135@item initfirst
1136This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1137It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1138before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1139the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1140the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1141objects.
1142
1143@item interpose
1144Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1145but the primary executable.
1146
5fa222e4
AM
1147@item lazy
1148When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1149dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1150the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1151Lazy binding is the default.
1152
cd6d6c15
NC
1153@item loadfltr
1154Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1155runtime.
1156
1157@item muldefs
1158Allows multiple definitions.
1159
1160@item nocombreloc
1161Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1162
b8871f35
L
1163@item nocommon
1164Generate common symbols with the STT_OBJECT type druing a relocatable
1165link.
1166
cd6d6c15 1167@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1168Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1169defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1170
1171@item nodefaultlib
1172Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1173ignore any default library search paths.
1174
1175@item nodelete
1176Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1177
1178@item nodlopen
1179Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1180
1181@item nodump
1182Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1183
6aa29e7b
JJ
1184@item noexecstack
1185Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1186
8dfef1bd
L
1187@item text
1188Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1189
1190@item notext
1191Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1192
1193@item textoff
1194Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1195
6aa29e7b
JJ
1196@item norelro
1197Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1198
cd6d6c15
NC
1199@item now
1200When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1201dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1202when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1203deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1204first called.
1205
1206@item origin
1207Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1208
6aa29e7b
JJ
1209@item relro
1210Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1211
24718e3b
L
1212@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1213Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1214
1215@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1216Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1217
04c3a755
NS
1218@item stack-size=@var{value}
1219Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1220Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1221@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1222
d258b828
IZ
1223@item bndplt
1224Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1225
889c2a67
L
1226@item noextern-protected-data
1227Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1228library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1229to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1230generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
4dba69b9 1231module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
889c2a67
L
1232i386 and x86-64.
1233
954b63d4
AM
1234@item dynamic-undefined-weak
1235Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1236if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1237by symbol visibility or versioning. Not all targets support this
1238option.
1239
aec6b87e 1240@item nodynamic-undefined-weak
954b63d4
AM
1241Do not make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic
1242object. Not all targets support this option. If neither
1243@option{-z nodynamic-undefined-weak} nor @option{-z dynamic-undefined-weak}
1244are given, a target may default to either option being in force, or
1245make some other selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic.
aec6b87e 1246
4c10bbaa
L
1247@item noreloc-overflow
1248Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1249relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1250overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1251
caa65211 1252@item call-nop=prefix-addr
caa65211
L
1253@itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1254@itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1255@itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1256Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1257to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1258@option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
caa65211
L
1259@option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1260@option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1261@option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1262Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1263
cd6d6c15
NC
1264@end table
1265
ece2d90e 1266Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1267
1268@kindex -(
1269@cindex groups of archives
1270@item -( @var{archives} -)
1271@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1272The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1273either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1274
1275The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1276references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1277the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1278archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1279object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1280would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1281they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1282resolved.
1283
1284Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1285it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1286more archives.
1287
69da35b5
NC
1288@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1289@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1290@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1291@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1292Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1293recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1294and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1295the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1296behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1297so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1298restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1299
4a43e768
AM
1300@kindex --as-needed
1301@kindex --no-as-needed
1302@item --as-needed
1303@itemx --no-as-needed
1304This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1305on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1306the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1307on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1308needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1309emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1310non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1311the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1312non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1313Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1314the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1315needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1316from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1317
e56f61be
L
1318@kindex --add-needed
1319@kindex --no-add-needed
1320@item --add-needed
1321@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1322These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1323their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1324options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1325and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1326
252b5132
RH
1327@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1328@item -assert @var{keyword}
1329This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1330
1331@kindex -Bdynamic
1332@kindex -dy
1333@kindex -call_shared
1334@item -Bdynamic
1335@itemx -dy
1336@itemx -call_shared
1337Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1338for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1339default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1340for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1341multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1342@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1343
a1ab1d2a
UD
1344@kindex -Bgroup
1345@item -Bgroup
1346Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1347section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1348object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1349@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1350only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1351
252b5132
RH
1352@kindex -Bstatic
1353@kindex -dn
1354@kindex -non_shared
1355@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1356@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1357@itemx -dn
1358@itemx -non_shared
1359@itemx -static
1360Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1361platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1362variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1363may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1364library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1365option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1366option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1367shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1368references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1369libraries.
252b5132
RH
1370
1371@kindex -Bsymbolic
1372@item -Bsymbolic
1373When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1374definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1375for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
e20365c5
L
1376within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1377@option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1378executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1379the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1380support shared libraries and position independent executables.
252b5132 1381
40b36307
L
1382@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1383@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1384When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1385symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
e20365c5
L
1386This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1387when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1388to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
40b36307 1389This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
e20365c5 1390libraries and position independent executables.
40b36307 1391
55255dae
L
1392@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1393@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1394Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1395typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1396global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1397within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1398to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1399in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1400which support shared libraries.
1401
1402The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1403scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1404
40b36307
L
1405@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1406@item --dynamic-list-data
1407Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1408
1409@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1410@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1411Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1412is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1413
0b8a70d9
L
1414@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1415@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1416Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1417
252b5132
RH
1418@kindex --check-sections
1419@kindex --no-check-sections
1420@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1421@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1422Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1423been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1424perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1425suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1426allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1427restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1428Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1429force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1430option.
252b5132 1431
ddbb8a31
NC
1432@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1433@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1434@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1435@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1436This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1437by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1438command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1439output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1440input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1441specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1442follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1443behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1444
1445This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1446libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1447mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1448their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1449required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1450the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1451dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1452symbols.
1453
252b5132
RH
1454@cindex cross reference table
1455@kindex --cref
1456@item --cref
1457Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1458generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1459Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1460
1461The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1462easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1463sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1464symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1465definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1466where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1467symbol are listed.
252b5132 1468
4818e05f
AM
1469@cindex common allocation
1470@kindex --no-define-common
1471@item --no-define-common
1472This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1473The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1474@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1475
1476The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1477the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1478of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1479forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1480Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1481from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1482This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1483and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1484duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1485paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1486
7bdf4127
AB
1487@cindex group allocation in linker script
1488@cindex section groups
1489@cindex COMDAT
1490@kindex --force-group-allocation
1491@item --force-group-allocation
1492This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1493normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1494default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1495change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1496command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1497effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1498
252b5132 1499@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1500@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1501@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1502Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1503address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1504times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1505limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1506context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1507symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1508constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1509using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1510@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1511equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1512
1513@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1514@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1515@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1516@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1517@itemx --no-demangle
1518These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1519and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1520present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1521underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1522mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1523different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1524to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1525demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1526is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1527
1528@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1529@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1530@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1531@item -I@var{file}
1532@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1533Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1534generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1535linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1536doing.
1537
9b8b325a
RF
1538@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1539@item --no-dynamic-linker
1540When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1541linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1542executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1543entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1544
a70f34c0
NC
1545@kindex --embedded-relocs
1546@item --embedded-relocs
1547This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
1548that the relocs are stored in a target specific section. This option
1549is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1550targets.
1551
7ce691ae 1552@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1553@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1554@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1555@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1556Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1557with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1558
252b5132
RH
1559@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1560@item --force-exe-suffix
1561Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1562
1563If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1564@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1565the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1566option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1567Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1568it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1569
1570@kindex --gc-sections
1571@kindex --no-gc-sections
1572@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1573@item --gc-sections
1574@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1575Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1576targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1577performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1578@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1579collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1580implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1581
d5465ba2
AM
1582@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1583examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1584symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1585command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1586referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1587libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1588referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1589the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1590relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1591
ac69cbc6 1592This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1593@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1594specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1595a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1596
c17d87de
NC
1597@kindex --print-gc-sections
1598@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1599@cindex garbage collection
1600@item --print-gc-sections
1601@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1602List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1603printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1604collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1605default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1606be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1607line.
1608
22185505 1609@kindex --gc-keep-exported
1610@cindex garbage collection
1611@item --gc-keep-exported
1612When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1613collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1614default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1615executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1616collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1617Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1618it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1619ELF format targets.
1620
30824704
RM
1621@kindex --print-output-format
1622@cindex output format
1623@item --print-output-format
1624Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1625other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1626in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1627
3604cb1f
TG
1628@kindex --print-memory-usage
1629@cindex memory usage
1630@item --print-memory-usage
1631Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1632the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1633quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1634headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1635parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1636
1637@smallexample
1638Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1639 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1640 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1641@end smallexample
1642
252b5132
RH
1643@cindex help
1644@cindex usage
1645@kindex --help
1646@item --help
1647Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1648
ea20a7da
CC
1649@kindex --target-help
1650@item --target-help
1651Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1652
2509a395
SL
1653@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1654@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1655Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1656@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1657
1658@cindex memory usage
1659@kindex --no-keep-memory
1660@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1661@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1662symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1663instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1664necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1665while linking a large executable.
1666
1667@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1668@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1669@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1670@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1671Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1672is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1673The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1674behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1675libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1676
aa713662
L
1677@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1678@kindex -z muldefs
1679@item --allow-multiple-definition
1680@itemx -z muldefs
1681Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1682report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1683first definition will be used.
1684
b79e8c78 1685@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1686@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1687@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1688@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1689Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1690This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1691determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1692shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1693how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1694
903249d7
NC
1695The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1696referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1697an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1698a shared library.
1699
1700The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1701libraries specified at link time are that:
1702
1703@itemize @bullet
1704@item
1705A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1706that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1707resolvable at load time.
1708@item
1709There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1710symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1711
1712The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1713select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1714architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1715appropriate memset function.
1716@end itemize
b79e8c78 1717
31941635
L
1718@kindex --no-undefined-version
1719@item --no-undefined-version
1720Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1721it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1722will be issued instead.
1723
3e3b46e5
PB
1724@kindex --default-symver
1725@item --default-symver
1726Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1727exported symbols.
1728
1729@kindex --default-imported-symver
1730@item --default-imported-symver
1731Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1732imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1733
252b5132
RH
1734@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1735@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1736Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1737files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1738been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1739This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1740errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1741have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1742inappropriate.
1743
fe7929ce
AM
1744@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1745@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1746Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1747library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1748
252b5132
RH
1749@kindex --no-whole-archive
1750@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1751Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1752archive files.
1753
1754@cindex output file after errors
1755@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1756@item --noinhibit-exec
1757Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1758Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1759errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1760when it issues any error whatsoever.
1761
0a9c1c8e
CD
1762@kindex -nostdlib
1763@item -nostdlib
1764Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1765command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1766(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1767
252b5132 1768@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1769@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1770@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1771@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1772file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1773@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1774object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1775object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1776should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1777usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1778name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1779list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1780command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1781this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1782@end ifclear
1783
76359541
TP
1784@kindex --out-implib
1785@item --out-implib @var{file}
1786Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1787the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1788library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1789may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1790behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1791step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1792the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1793
36af4a4e
JJ
1794@kindex -pie
1795@kindex --pic-executable
1796@item -pie
1797@itemx --pic-executable
1798@cindex position independent executables
1799Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1800ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1801libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1802address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1803normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1804defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1805
252b5132
RH
1806@kindex -qmagic
1807@item -qmagic
1808This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1809
1810@kindex -Qy
1811@item -Qy
1812This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1813
1814@kindex --relax
1815@cindex synthesizing linker
1816@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1817@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1818@item --relax
28d5f677 1819@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1820An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1821@ifset GENERIC
1822This option is only supported on a few targets.
1823@end ifset
1824@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1825@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1826@end ifset
1827@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1828@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1829@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1830@ifset XTENSA
1831@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1832@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1833@ifset M68HC11
1834@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1835@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1836@ifset NIOSII
1837@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1838@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1839@ifset POWERPC
1840@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1841@end ifset
252b5132 1842
28d5f677
NC
1843On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1844global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1845addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1846synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1847instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1848
1849On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1850debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1851@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1852This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1853family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1854@end ifset
1855
1856@ifset GENERIC
1857On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1858but ignored.
1859@end ifset
1860
28d5f677
NC
1861On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1862@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1863
252b5132
RH
1864@cindex retaining specified symbols
1865@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1866@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1867@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1868@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1869Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1870discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1871symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1872@ifset GENERIC
1873(such as VxWorks)
1874@end ifset
1875where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1876run-time memory.
1877
1878@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1879or symbols needed for relocations.
1880
1881You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1882line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1883
1884@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1885@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1886@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1887@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1888Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1889linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1890arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1891them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1892also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1893objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1894@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1895ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1896@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1897
ff5dcc92 1898The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
d8506323 1899SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1900@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1901runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1902options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1903gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1904file systems.
252b5132 1905
ff5dcc92 1906For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1907followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1908the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1909@end ifset
1910
1911@ifset GENERIC
1912@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1913@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1914@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1915When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1916happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1917of the input files.
1918
1919When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1920non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1921shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1922explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1923specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1924@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1925either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1926appearing multiple times.
1927
e680a6b6
NC
1928The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1929directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1930containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
1931and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
193264-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
1933
1934The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
1935@var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
1936supported.
1937
28c309a2
NC
1938This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1939that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1940is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1941runtime linker would do.
1942
252b5132 1943The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1944libraries:
252b5132
RH
1945@enumerate
1946@item
ff5dcc92 1947Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1948@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1949Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1950between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1951specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1952used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1953at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1954by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1955the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1956@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1957On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1958@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1959environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1960@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1961On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1962directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1963@item
a1b8d843 1964For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1965variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1966@item
ec4eb78a
L
1967For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1968@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1969libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1970@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1971@item
252b5132
RH
1972The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1973@item
1974For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1975exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1976@end enumerate
1977
1978If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1979warning and continue with the link.
1980@end ifset
1981
1982@kindex -shared
1983@kindex -Bshareable
1984@item -shared
1985@itemx -Bshareable
1986@cindex shared libraries
1987Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1988and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1989shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1990undefined symbols in the link.
1991
252b5132 1992@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1993@item --sort-common
1994@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1995@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1996This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1997ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1998sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1999eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2000between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2001specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 2002
2509a395
SL
2003@kindex --sort-section=name
2004@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
2005This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2006patterns in the linker script.
2007
2509a395
SL
2008@kindex --sort-section=alignment
2009@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
2010This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2011patterns in the linker script.
2012
a70f34c0
NC
2013@kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2014@item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2015This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2016.dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2017post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2018
252b5132 2019@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 2020@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 2021Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
2022each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2023size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
2024
2025@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 2026@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 2027Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 2028output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 2029This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
2030certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2031cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2032that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2033support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2034input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2035more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 2036many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
2037
2038@kindex --stats
2039@item --stats
2040Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2041as execution time and memory usage.
2042
2509a395 2043@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
2044@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2045Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2046configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2047that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2048
a70f34c0
NC
2049@kindex --task-link
2050@item --task-link
2051This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2052file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2053
252b5132
RH
2054@kindex --traditional-format
2055@cindex traditional format
2056@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
2057For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2058the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
2059use the traditional format instead.
2060
2061@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 2062For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
2063symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2064full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2065@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 2066trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
2067combine duplicate entries.
2068
2509a395
SL
2069@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2070@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
2071Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2072address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2073times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2074line.
2075@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2076for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2077@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2078should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2079sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2080
2509a395
SL
2081@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2082@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2083@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 2084@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
2085@item -Tbss=@var{org}
2086@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2087@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2088Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 2089@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 2090
2509a395
SL
2091@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2092@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 2093@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
2094When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2095byte of the text segment.
258795f5 2096
9d5777a3
RM
2097@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2098@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2099@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2100When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2101the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2102text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2103
0d705e9f
AM
2104@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2105@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2106@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2107When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2108model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2109
560e09e9
NC
2110@kindex --unresolved-symbols
2111@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2112Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2113values for @samp{method}:
2114
2115@table @samp
2116@item ignore-all
da8bce14 2117Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
2118
2119@item report-all
da8bce14 2120Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
2121
2122@item ignore-in-object-files
2123Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2124ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2125
2126@item ignore-in-shared-libs
2127Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2128ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2129when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2130libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2131command line.
2132@end table
2133
2134The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2135by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2136
2137Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2138unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2139can change this to a warning.
2140
1715a13c
L
2141@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2142@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 2143@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 2144@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 2145Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 2146supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
2147the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2148argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
2149
2150@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2151@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 2152@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
2153Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2154used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 2155about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
2156is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2157see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2158use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2159symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2160@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 2161
7ce691ae 2162@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
2163@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2164@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2165@item --warn-common
2166Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 2167a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
2168but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2169you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 2170Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
2171warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2172
2173There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2174
2175@table @samp
2176@item int i = 1;
2177A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2178file.
2179
2180@item extern int i;
2181An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2182There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2183variable somewhere.
2184
2185@item int i;
2186A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2187variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2188The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2189single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2190size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2191a definition of the same variable.
2192@end table
2193
2194The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2195Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2196just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2197encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2198a common symbol.
2199
2200@enumerate
2201@item
2202Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2203definition for the symbol.
2204@smallexample
2205@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2206 overridden by definition
2207@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2208@end smallexample
2209
2210@item
2211Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2212the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2213except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2214@smallexample
2215@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2216 overriding common
2217@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2218@end smallexample
2219
2220@item
2221Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2222@smallexample
2223@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2224 of `@var{symbol}'
2225@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2226@end smallexample
2227
2228@item
2229Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2230@smallexample
2231@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2232 overridden by larger common
2233@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2234@end smallexample
2235
2236@item
2237Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2238the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2239encountered in a different order.
2240@smallexample
2241@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2242 overriding smaller common
2243@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2244@end smallexample
2245@end enumerate
2246
2247@kindex --warn-constructors
2248@item --warn-constructors
2249Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2250object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2251detect the use of global constructors.
2252
2253@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2254@item --warn-multiple-gp
2255Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2256This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2257Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2258section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2259of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2260base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2261base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2262bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2263large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2264values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2265option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2266
2267@kindex --warn-once
2268@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2269@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2270@item --warn-once
2271Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2272which refers to it.
2273
2274@kindex --warn-section-align
2275@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2276@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2277@item --warn-section-align
2278Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2279alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2280The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2281is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2282the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2283
8fdd7217
NC
2284@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2285@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2286Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2287
a0c402a5
L
2288@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2289@item --warn-alternate-em
2290Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2291
560e09e9
NC
2292@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2293@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2294If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2295@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2296This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2297
2298@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2299@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2300This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2301it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2302
252b5132
RH
2303@kindex --whole-archive
2304@cindex including an entire archive
2305@item --whole-archive
2306For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2307@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2308in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2309files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2310library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2311library. This option may be used more than once.
2312
7ec229ce 2313Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2314about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2315Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2316list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2317your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2318
2509a395
SL
2319@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2320@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2321Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2322@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2323undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2324@var{symbol}.
2325
2326This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2327wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2328wishes to call the system function, it should call
2329@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2330
2331Here is a trivial example:
2332
2333@smallexample
2334void *
cc2f008e 2335__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2336@{
cc2f008e 2337 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2338 return __real_malloc (c);
2339@}
2340@end smallexample
2341
ff5dcc92 2342If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2343all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2344instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2345call the real @code{malloc} function.
2346
2347You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2348links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2349you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2350file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2351call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2352
6aa29e7b 2353@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b 2354@kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
6aa29e7b 2355@item --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b
NC
2356@itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2357Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2358(@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2359section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
6aa29e7b 2360
e41b3a13
JJ
2361@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2362@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2363Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2364generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2365if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2366
6c1439be
L
2367@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2368@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2369@item --enable-new-dtags
2370@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2371This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2372systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2373@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2374and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2375If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2376created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2377those options are only available for ELF systems.
2378
2d643429 2379@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2380@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2381Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2382close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2383time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2384increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2385value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2386
fdc90cb4
JJ
2387@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2388@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2389Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2390@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2391new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2392the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2393hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2394
0ce398f1
L
2395@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2396@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2397@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2398@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2399@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2400@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2401@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2402@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
9af89fba
NC
2403On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2404compressed using zlib.
2405
2406@option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2407sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2408DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2409instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2410also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2411sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2412
2413The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2414@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2415
2416Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2417sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2418for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2419uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2420
2421The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2422involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2423default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2424@option{--help} option.
0ce398f1 2425
35835446
JR
2426@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2427@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2428This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2429linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2430for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2431about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2432
4f9c04f7 2433Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 24341021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2435run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2436has been used.
2437
2438The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2439enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2440
c0065db7
RM
2441@kindex --build-id
2442@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2443@item --build-id
2444@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c 2445Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
6033bf41 2446or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
61e2488c
JT
2447unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2448@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2449@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2450@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2451the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2452string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2453@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2454is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2455
2456The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2457that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2458unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2459to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2460file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2461string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2462
2463Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2464@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2465@end table
2466
0285c67d
NC
2467@c man end
2468
36f63dca 2469@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2470
0285c67d
NC
2471@c man begin OPTIONS
2472
ff5dcc92 2473The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2474the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2475normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2476use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2477@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2478like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2479symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2480object file).
2481
2482In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2483support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2484PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2485values by either a space or an equals sign.
2486
ff5dcc92 2487@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2488
2489@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2490@item --add-stdcall-alias
2491If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2492as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2493[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2494
2495@kindex --base-file
2496@item --base-file @var{file}
2497Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2498addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2499@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2500[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2501
2502@kindex --dll
2503@item --dll
2504Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2505@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2506file.
bb10df36 2507[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2508
88183869
DK
2509@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2510@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2511@item --enable-long-section-names
2512@itemx --disable-long-section-names
56e6cf80 2513The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
88183869 2514the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
56e6cf80
NC
2515for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2516fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
88183869
DK
2517to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2518allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2519disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2520generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2521as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2522with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2523GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2524information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2525option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2526section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2527when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2528image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2529[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2530
252b5132
RH
2531@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2532@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2533@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2534@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2535If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2536do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2537only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2538resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2539undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2540@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2541to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2542warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2543import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2544to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2545feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2546@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2547mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2548[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2549
522f09cd
KT
2550@kindex --leading-underscore
2551@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2552@item --leading-underscore
2553@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2554For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2555in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2556disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2557
252b5132
RH
2558@cindex DLLs, creating
2559@kindex --export-all-symbols
2560@item --export-all-symbols
2561If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2562be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2563otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2564explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2565attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2566option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2567@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2568@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2569exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2570re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2571such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2572@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2573@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2574Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2575not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2576extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2577(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2578These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2579@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2580@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2581@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2582@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2583[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2584
2585@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2586@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2587Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2588exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2589[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2590
2927aaca
NC
2591@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2592@item --exclude-all-symbols
2593Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2594[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2595
252b5132
RH
2596@kindex --file-alignment
2597@item --file-alignment
2598Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2599file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2600512.
bb10df36 2601[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2602
2603@cindex heap size
2604@kindex --heap
2605@item --heap @var{reserve}
2606@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2607Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2608to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2609committed.
bb10df36 2610[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2611
2612@cindex image base
2613@kindex --image-base
2614@item --image-base @var{value}
2615Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2616the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2617is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2618your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2619other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2620for dlls.
bb10df36 2621[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2622
2623@kindex --kill-at
2624@item --kill-at
2625If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2626symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2627[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2628
26d2d8a2
BF
2629@kindex --large-address-aware
2630@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2631If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2632header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2633greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2634or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2635section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2636[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2637
f69a2f97
NC
2638@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2639@item --disable-large-address-aware
2640Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2641This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2642driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2643addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2644[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2645
252b5132
RH
2646@kindex --major-image-version
2647@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2648Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2649[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2650
2651@kindex --major-os-version
2652@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2653Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2654[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2655
2656@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2657@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2658Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2659[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2660
2661@kindex --minor-image-version
2662@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2663Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2664[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2665
2666@kindex --minor-os-version
2667@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2668Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2669[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2670
2671@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2672@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2673Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2674[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2675
2676@cindex DEF files, creating
2677@cindex DLLs, creating
2678@kindex --output-def
2679@item --output-def @var{file}
2680The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2681file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2682(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2683library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2684automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2685[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2686
b044cda1 2687@cindex DLLs, creating
b044cda1
CW
2688@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2689@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2690@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2691Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2692@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2693By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2694for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2695execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2696[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2697
2698@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2699@item --disable-auto-image-base
2700Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2701user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2702default.
bb10df36 2703[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2704
2705@cindex DLLs, linking to
2706@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2707@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2708When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2709search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2710@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2711between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2712uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2713@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2714[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2715
2716@kindex --enable-auto-import
2717@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2718Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2719DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2720building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2721'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2722to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2723specification published by Microsoft.
2724
e2a83dd0
NC
2725Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2726data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2727placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2728around a problem with consts that is described here:
2729http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2730
4d8907ac
DS
2731Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2732see this message:
0d888aac 2733
ece2d90e 2734"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2735documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2736
ece2d90e
NC
2737This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2738ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2739allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2740fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2741constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2742multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2743this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2744of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2745the warning, and exit.
2746
2747There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2748data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2749
2fa9fc65
NC
2750One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2751of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2752this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2753
c0065db7
RM
2754A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2755that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2756there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2757a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2758
2759@example
2760extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2761extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2762 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2763@end example
2764
2765or
2766
2767@example
2768extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2769extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2770 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2771@end example
2772
c0065db7 2773For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2774is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2775
2776@example
2777extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2778extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2779 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2780@end example
2781
c406afaf
NC
2782or
2783
2784@example
2785extern long long extern_ll;
2786extern_ll -->
2787 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2788@end example
2789
2fa9fc65 2790A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2791'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2792@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2793requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2794building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2795merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2796between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2797constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2798
2799Original:
2800@example
2801--foo.h
2802extern int arr[];
2803--foo.c
2804#include "foo.h"
2805void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2806 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2807@}
2808@end example
2809
2810Solution 1:
2811@example
2812--foo.h
2813extern int arr[];
2814--foo.c
2815#include "foo.h"
2816void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2817 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2818 volatile int *parr = arr;
2819 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2820@}
2821@end example
2822
2823Solution 2:
2824@example
2825--foo.h
2826/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2827#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2828 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2829#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2830#else
2831#define FOO_IMPORT
2832#endif
2833extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2834--foo.c
2835#include "foo.h"
2836void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2837 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2838@}
2839@end example
2840
c0065db7 2841A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2842library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2843for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2844functions).
bb10df36 2845[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2846
2847@kindex --disable-auto-import
2848@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2849Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2850@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2851[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2852
2fa9fc65
NC
2853@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2854@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2855If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2856that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2857a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2858environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2859[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2860
2861@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2862@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2863Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
676ee43b 2864DLLs.
bb10df36 2865[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2866
b044cda1
CW
2867@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2868@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2869Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2870[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2871
252b5132
RH
2872@kindex --section-alignment
2873@item --section-alignment
2874Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2875addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2876[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2877
2878@cindex stack size
2879@kindex --stack
2880@item --stack @var{reserve}
2881@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2882Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2883to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2884committed.
bb10df36 2885[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2886
2887@kindex --subsystem
2888@item --subsystem @var{which}
2889@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2890@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2891Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2892legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2893@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2894the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2895@var{which}.
bb10df36 2896[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2897
2f563b51
DK
2898The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2899of the PE file header:
2900[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2901
2d5c3743
NC
2902@kindex --high-entropy-va
2903@item --high-entropy-va
2904Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2905(ASLR).
2906
2f563b51
DK
2907@kindex --dynamicbase
2908@item --dynamicbase
2909The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2910randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2911Vista for i386 PE targets.
2912
2913@kindex --forceinteg
2914@item --forceinteg
2915Code integrity checks are enforced.
2916
2917@kindex --nxcompat
2918@item --nxcompat
2919The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2920This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2921
2922@kindex --no-isolation
2923@item --no-isolation
2924Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2925
2926@kindex --no-seh
2927@item --no-seh
2928The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2929this image.
2930
2931@kindex --no-bind
2932@item --no-bind
2933Do not bind this image.
2934
2935@kindex --wdmdriver
2936@item --wdmdriver
2937The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2938
2f563b51
DK
2939@kindex --tsaware
2940@item --tsaware
2941The image is Terminal Server aware.
2942
0cb112f7
CF
2943@kindex --insert-timestamp
2944@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
2945@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2946Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2947as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2948other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
56e6cf80 2949will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
eeb14e5a
LZ
2950same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2951can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
56e6cf80 2952that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
eeb14e5a 2953identically.
252b5132
RH
2954@end table
2955
0285c67d
NC
2956@c man end
2957
ac145307
BS
2958@ifset C6X
2959@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2960
2961@c man begin OPTIONS
2962
2963The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2964libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2965all executables use an index of 0.
2966
2967@table @gcctabopt
2968
2969@kindex --dsbt-size
2970@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
56e6cf80 2971This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
ac145307
BS
2972or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2973entries.
2974
2975@kindex --dsbt-index
2976@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2977This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2978to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2979executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2980@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2981
fbd9ad90
PB
2982@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2983The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2984exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2985
ac145307
BS
2986@end table
2987
2988@c man end
2989@end ifset
2990
93fd0973
SC
2991@ifset M68HC11
2992@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2993
2994@c man begin OPTIONS
2995
2996The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2997memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2998
2999@table @gcctabopt
3000
3001@kindex --no-trampoline
3002@item --no-trampoline
3003This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3004is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3005instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3006
3007@kindex --bank-window
3008@item --bank-window @var{name}
3009This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3010the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3011The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3012paging and addresses within the memory window.
3013
3014@end table
3015
3016@c man end
3017@end ifset
3018
7fb9f789
NC
3019@ifset M68K
3020@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3021
3022@c man begin OPTIONS
3023
3024The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3025when linking for 68K targets.
3026
3027@table @gcctabopt
3028
3029@kindex --got
3030@item --got=@var{type}
3031This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3032@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3033@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3034Info entry for @file{ld}.
3035
3036@end table
3037
3038@c man end
3039@end ifset
3040
833794fc
MR
3041@ifset MIPS
3042@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3043
3044@c man begin OPTIONS
3045
3046The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
8b10b0b3
MR
3047generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3048linking for MIPS targets.
833794fc
MR
3049
3050@table @gcctabopt
3051
3052@kindex --insn32
3053@item --insn32
3054@kindex --no-insn32
3055@itemx --no-insn32
3056These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3057generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3058or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
305932-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3060used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3061possible.
3062
8b10b0b3
MR
3063@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3064@item --ignore-branch-isa
3065@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3066@itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3067These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3068transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3069accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3070is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3071instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3072equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3073calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3074a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3075an error.
3076
833794fc
MR
3077@end table
3078
3079@c man end
3080@end ifset
3081
252b5132
RH
3082@ifset UsesEnvVars
3083@node Environment
3084@section Environment Variables
3085
0285c67d
NC
3086@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3087
560e09e9 3088You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
3089@ifclear SingleFormat
3090@code{GNUTARGET},
3091@end ifclear
3092@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 3093
36f63dca 3094@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
3095@kindex GNUTARGET
3096@cindex default input format
3097@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3098use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3099of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 3100@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
3101of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3102attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3103this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3104there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3105object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3106BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3107in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 3108@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
3109
3110@kindex LDEMULATION
3111@cindex default emulation
3112@cindex emulation, default
3113@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3114@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3115behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3116available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3117the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3118variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3119linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
3120
3121@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3122@cindex demangling, default
3123Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3124@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3125default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3126a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3127may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3128options.
3129
0285c67d
NC
3130@c man end
3131@end ifset
3132
252b5132
RH
3133@node Scripts
3134@chapter Linker Scripts
3135
3136@cindex scripts
3137@cindex linker scripts
3138@cindex command files
3139Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3140written in the linker command language.
3141
3142The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3143the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3144the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3145more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3146direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3147described below.
3148
3149The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3150yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3151linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
3152to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
3153such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3154
3155You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3156line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3157default linker script.
3158
3159You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3160to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3161Linker Scripts}.
3162
3163@menu
3164* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3165* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3166* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3167* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3168* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3169* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3170* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3171* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3172* VERSION:: VERSION Command
3173* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3174* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3175@end menu
3176
3177@node Basic Script Concepts
3178@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3179@cindex linker script concepts
3180We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3181describe the linker script language.
3182
3183The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3184file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3185@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3186The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3187purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3188among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3189section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3190in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3191
3192Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3193also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3194contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3195the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3196A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3197area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3198loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3199which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3200of debugging information.
3201
3202Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3203first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3204the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3205@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3206section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3207same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3208is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3209(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3210based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3211RAM address would be the VMA.
3212
3213You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3214program with the @samp{-h} option.
3215
3216Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3217@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3218has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3219information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3220will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3221static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3222referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3223
3224You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3225program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3226option.
3227
3228@node Script Format
3229@section Linker Script Format
3230@cindex linker script format
3231Linker scripts are text files.
3232
3233You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3234either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3235symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3236generally ignored.
3237
3238Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3239If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3240otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3241double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3242file name.
3243
3244You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3245@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3246to whitespace.
3247
3248@node Simple Example
3249@section Simple Linker Script Example
3250@cindex linker script example
3251@cindex example of linker script
3252Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3253
3254The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3255@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3256memory layout of the output file.
3257
3258The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3259describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3260code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3261@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3262Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3263your input files.
3264
3265For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
32660x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3267linker script which will do that:
3268@smallexample
3269SECTIONS
3270@{
3271 . = 0x10000;
3272 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3273 . = 0x8000000;
3274 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3275 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3276@}
3277@end smallexample
3278
3279You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3280followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3281descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3282
252b5132
RH
3283The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3284sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3285counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3286other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3287current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3288incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3289@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3290
3291The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3292required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3293after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3294which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3295wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3296means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3297
3298Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3299@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3300@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3301
3302The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3303the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3304at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3305output section, the value of the location counter will be
3306@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3307effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3308immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3309
3310The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3311alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3312example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3313sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3314may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3315sections.
3316
3317That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3318
3319@node Simple Commands
3320@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3321@cindex linker script simple commands
3322In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3323
3324@menu
3325* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3326* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3327@ifclear SingleFormat
3328* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3329@end ifclear
3330
4a93e180 3331* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3332* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3333@end menu
3334
3335@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3336@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3337@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3338@cindex start of execution
3339@cindex first instruction
3340@cindex entry point
3341The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3342point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3343entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3344@smallexample
3345ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3346@end smallexample
3347
3348There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3349entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3350stopping when one of them succeeds:
3351@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3352@item
252b5132 3353the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3354@item
252b5132 3355the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3356@item
3ab904c4
NC
3357the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3358targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3359check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3360@item
252b5132 3361the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3362@item
252b5132
RH
3363The address @code{0}.
3364@end itemize
3365
3366@node File Commands
36f63dca 3367@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3368@cindex linker script file commands
3369Several linker script commands deal with files.
3370
3371@table @code
3372@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3373@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3374@cindex including a linker script
3375Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3376be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3377with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
337810 levels deep.
3379
4006703d
NS
3380You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3381@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3382
252b5132
RH
3383@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3384@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3385@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3386@cindex input files in linker scripts
3387@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3388@cindex linker script input object files
3389The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3390in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3391
3392For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3393a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3394then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3395
3396In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3397script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3398
e3f2db7f
AO
3399In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3400with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3401located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3402for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3403open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3404linker will search through the archive library search path.
3405The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3aa2d05a
NC
3406as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3407path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
3408@ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3409
ff5dcc92 3410If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3411name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3412@samp{-l}.
3413
3414When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3415files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3416script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3417
3418@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3419@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3420@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3421@cindex grouping input files
3422The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3423files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3424new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3425in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3426
b717d30e
JJ
3427@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3428@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3429@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3430This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3431commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3432as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3433with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3434when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3435@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3436and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3437setting afterwards.
3438
252b5132
RH
3439@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3440@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3441@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3442The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3443@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3444@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3445Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3446precedence.
3447
3448You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3449output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3450
3451@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3452@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3453@cindex library search path in linker script
3454@cindex archive search path in linker script
3455@cindex search path in linker script
3456The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3457@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3458@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3459on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3460are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3461the command line option are searched first.
3462
3463@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3464@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3465@cindex first input file
3466The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3467that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3468though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3469when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3470first file.
3471@end table
3472
3473@ifclear SingleFormat
3474@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3475@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3476A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3477
3478@table @code
3479@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3480@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3481@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3482@cindex output file format in linker script
3483The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3484output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3485exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3486(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3487line option takes precedence.
3488
3489You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3490formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3491This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3492desired endianness.
3493
3494If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3495will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3496output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3497used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3498
3499For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3500command:
3501@smallexample
3502OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3503@end smallexample
3504This says that the default format for the output file is
3505@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3506option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3507format.
3508
3509@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3510@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3511@cindex input file format in linker script
3512The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3513files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3514This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3515(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3516is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3517command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3518@end table
3519@end ifclear
3520
4a93e180
NC
3521@node REGION_ALIAS
3522@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3523@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3524@cindex region alias
3525@cindex region names
3526
3527Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3528@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3529
3530@smallexample
3531REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3532@end smallexample
3533
3534The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3535memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3536to memory regions. An example follows.
3537
3538Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3539memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3540that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3541non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3542access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3543read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3544sections:
3545
3546@itemize @bullet
3547@item
3548@code{.text} program code;
3549@item
3550@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3551@item
3552@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3553@item
3554@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3555@end itemize
3556
3557The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3558part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3559output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3560systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3561@code{C}:
3562@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3563@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3564@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3565@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3566@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3567@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3568@end multitable
3569The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3570loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3571the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3572the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3573
3574The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3575includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3576memory layout:
3577@smallexample
3578INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3579
3580SECTIONS
3581 @{
3582 .text :
3583 @{
3584 *(.text)
3585 @} > REGION_TEXT
3586 .rodata :
3587 @{
3588 *(.rodata)
3589 rodata_end = .;
3590 @} > REGION_RODATA
3591 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3592 @{
3593 data_start = .;
3594 *(.data)
3595 @} > REGION_DATA
3596 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3597 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3598 .bss :
3599 @{
3600 *(.bss)
3601 @} > REGION_BSS
3602 @}
3603@end smallexample
3604
3605Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3606regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3607variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3608@table @code
3609@item A
3610Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3611@smallexample
3612MEMORY
3613 @{
3614 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3615 @}
3616
3617REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3618REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3619REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3620REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3621@end smallexample
3622@item B
3623Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3624into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3625@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3626@smallexample
3627MEMORY
3628 @{
3629 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3630 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3631 @}
3632
3633REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3634REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3635REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3636REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3637@end smallexample
3638@item C
3639Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3640@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3641initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3642system start into the @code{RAM}.
3643@smallexample
3644MEMORY
3645 @{
3646 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3647 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3648 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3649 @}
3650
3651REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3652REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3653REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3654REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3655@end smallexample
3656@end table
3657
3658It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3659@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3660necessary:
3661@smallexample
3662#include <string.h>
3663
3664extern char data_start [];
3665extern char data_size [];
3666extern char data_load_start [];
3667
3668void copy_data(void)
3669@{
3670 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3671 @{
3672 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3673 @}
3674@}
3675@end smallexample
3676
252b5132 3677@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3678@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3679There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3680
3681@table @code
3682@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3683@kindex ASSERT
3684@cindex assertion in linker script
3685Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3686with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3687
fd1c4238
NC
3688Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3689take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3690inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3691for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3692symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3693
3694@smallexample
3695 .stack :
3696 @{
3697 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3698 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3699 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3700 @}
3701@end smallexample
3702
3703will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3704PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3705can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3706
3707@smallexample
3708 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3709 .stack :
3710 @{
3711 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3712 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3713 @}
3714@end smallexample
3715
3716will work.
3717
252b5132
RH
3718@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3719@kindex EXTERN
3720@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3721Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3722symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3723modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3724each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3725command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3726
3727@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3728@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3729@cindex common allocation in linker script
3730This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3731to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3732output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3733
4818e05f
AM
3734@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3735@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3736@cindex common allocation in linker script
3737This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3738command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3739to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3740
7bdf4127
AB
3741@item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3742@kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3743@cindex group allocation in linker script
3744@cindex section groups
3745@cindex COMDAT
3746This command has the same effect as the
3747@samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
3748@command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
3749and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
3750specified (@samp{-r}).
3751
53d25da6
AM
3752@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3753@kindex INSERT
3754@cindex insert user script into default script
3755This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3756augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3757inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3758@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3759default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3760sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3761linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3762insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3763linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3764default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3765of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3766to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3767is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3768
3769@smallexample
3770SECTIONS
3771@{
3772 OVERLAY :
3773 @{
3774 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3775 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3776 @}
3777@}
3778INSERT AFTER .text;
3779@end smallexample
3780
252b5132
RH
3781@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3782@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3783@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3784This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3785references among certain output sections.
3786
3787In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3788using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3789will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3790errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3791a function defined in the other section.
3792
3793The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3794@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3795an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3796@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3797names.
3798
cdf96953
MF
3799@item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3800@kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3801@cindex cross references
3802This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3803references to one section from a list of other sections.
3804
3805The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3806output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3807a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3808there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3809must never call back.
3810
3811The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3812The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3813If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3814the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3815status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3816names, not input section names.
3817
252b5132
RH
3818@ifclear SingleFormat
3819@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3820@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3821@cindex machine architecture
3822@cindex architecture
3823Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3824of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3825architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3826the @samp{-f} option.
3827@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3828
3829@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3830@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3831This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3832@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3833in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3834@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3835@end table
3836
3837@node Assignments
3838@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3839@cindex assignment in scripts
3840@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3841@cindex variables, defining
3842You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3843the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3844
3845@menu
3846* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3847* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3848* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3849* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3850* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3851@end menu
3852
3853@node Simple Assignments
3854@subsection Simple Assignments
3855
3856You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3857
3858@table @code
3859@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3860@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3861@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3862@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3863@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3864@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3865@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3866@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3867@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3868@end table
3869
3870The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3871@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3872defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3873
3874The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3875may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3876
3877The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3878
3879Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3880
3881You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3882statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3883section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3884
3885The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3886expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3887
3888Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3889assignments may be used:
3890
3891@smallexample
3892floating_point = 0;
3893SECTIONS
3894@{
3895 .text :
3896 @{
3897 *(.text)
3898 _etext = .;
3899 @}
156e34dd 3900 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3901 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3902@}
3903@end smallexample
3904@noindent
3905In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3906zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3907the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3908defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3909upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3910
eb8476a6
MR
3911@node HIDDEN
3912@subsection HIDDEN
3913@cindex HIDDEN
3914For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3915exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3916
3917Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3918@code{HIDDEN}:
3919
3920@smallexample
3921HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3922SECTIONS
3923@{
3924 .text :
3925 @{
3926 *(.text)
3927 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3928 @}
3929 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3930 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3931@}
3932@end smallexample
3933@noindent
3934In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3935
252b5132
RH
3936@node PROVIDE
3937@subsection PROVIDE
3938@cindex PROVIDE
3939In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3940only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3941the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3942@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3943@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3944@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3945@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3946@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3947
3948Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3949@smallexample
3950SECTIONS
3951@{
3952 .text :
3953 @{
3954 *(.text)
3955 _etext = .;
3956 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3957 @}
3958@}
3959@end smallexample
3960
3961In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3962underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3963the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3964underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3965If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3966linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3967
7af8e998
L
3968@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3969@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3970@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3971Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3972hidden and won't be exported.
3973
73ae6183
NC
3974@node Source Code Reference
3975@subsection Source Code Reference
3976
3977Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3978intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3979a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3980symbol that does not have a value.
3981
3982Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3983transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3984stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3985prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3986mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3987of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3988variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3989linker script variable might be referred to as:
3990
3991@smallexample
3992 extern int foo;
3993@end smallexample
3994
3995But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3996
3997@smallexample
3998 _foo = 1000;
3999@end smallexample
4000
4001In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4002transformation has taken place.
4003
4004When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4005things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4006in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4007second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4008table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4009contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4010value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4011
4012@smallexample
4013 int foo = 1000;
4014@end smallexample
4015
10bf6894 4016creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
4017holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4018number 1000 is initially stored.
4019
4020When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4021first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4022memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4023So:
4024
4025@smallexample
4026 foo = 1;
4027@end smallexample
4028
4029looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4030associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4031address. Whereas:
4032
4033@smallexample
4034 int * a = & foo;
4035@end smallexample
4036
10bf6894 4037looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
4038and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4039the variable @samp{a}.
4040
4041Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4042the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4043an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4044
4045@smallexample
4046 foo = 1000;
4047@end smallexample
4048
4049creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4050the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4051address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4052linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4053access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4054
4055Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4056you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4057use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4058section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4059linker script contains these declarations:
4060
4061@smallexample
4062@group
4063 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
a5e406b5 4064 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
73ae6183
NC
4065 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4066@end group
4067@end smallexample
4068
4069Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4070
4071@smallexample
4072@group
4073 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 4074
73ae6183
NC
4075 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4076@end group
4077@end smallexample
4078
4079Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
5707d2ad
NC
4080Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4081arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4082
4083@smallexample
4084@group
4085 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4086
4087 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4088@end group
4089@end smallexample
4090
4091Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4092operators.
73ae6183 4093
252b5132 4094@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 4095@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
4096@kindex SECTIONS
4097The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4098into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4099
4100The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4101@smallexample
4102SECTIONS
4103@{
4104 @var{sections-command}
4105 @var{sections-command}
4106 @dots{}
4107@}
4108@end smallexample
4109
4110Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4111
4112@itemize @bullet
4113@item
4114an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4115@item
4116a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4117@item
4118an output section description
4119@item
4120an overlay description
4121@end itemize
4122
4123The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4124@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4125those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4126understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4127the layout of the output file.
4128
4129Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4130below.
4131
4132If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4133linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4134section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4135input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4136example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4137in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4138
4139@menu
4140* Output Section Description:: Output section description
4141* Output Section Name:: Output section name
4142* Output Section Address:: Output section address
4143* Input Section:: Input section description
4144* Output Section Data:: Output section data
4145* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4146* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4147* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4148* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4149@end menu
4150
4151@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 4152@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
4153The full description of an output section looks like this:
4154@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4155@group
7e7d5768 4156@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 4157 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 4158 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
4159 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4160 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4161 @{
4162 @var{output-section-command}
4163 @var{output-section-command}
4164 @dots{}
abc9061b 4165 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4166@end group
4167@end smallexample
4168
4169Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4170
4171The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4172name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
4173The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4174the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
4175The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4176
4177Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4178
4179@itemize @bullet
4180@item
4181a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4182@item
4183an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4184@item
4185data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4186@item
4187a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4188@end itemize
4189
4190@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 4191@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
4192@cindex name, section
4193@cindex section name
4194The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4195meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4196support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4197must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4198example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4199output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4200names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4201quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4202characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4203commas must be quoted.
4204
4205The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4206Discarding}.
4207
4208@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 4209@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
4210@cindex address, section
4211@cindex section address
4212The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
4213address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4214is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4215
4216If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4217section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4218to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4219alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4220contained within the output section.
4221
4222The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4223
4224@itemize @bullet
4225@item
4226If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4227is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4228in that region.
4229
4230@item
4231If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4232regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4233section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4234be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4235
4236@item
4237If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4238the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4239counter.
4240@end itemize
4241
4242@noindent
4243For example:
4244
252b5132
RH
4245@smallexample
4246.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4247@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4248
252b5132
RH
4249@noindent
4250and
ea5cae92 4251
252b5132
RH
4252@smallexample
4253.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4254@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4255
252b5132
RH
4256@noindent
4257are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4258@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4259counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4260counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4261input sections.
252b5132
RH
4262
4263The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4264For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4265so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4266do something like this:
4267@smallexample
4268.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4269@end smallexample
4270@noindent
4271This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4272aligned upward to the specified value.
4273
4274Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4275location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4276sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4277
4278@node Input Section
36f63dca 4279@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4280@cindex input sections
4281@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4282The most common output section command is an input section description.
4283
4284The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4285You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4286in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4287map the input files into your memory layout.
4288
4289@menu
4290* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4291* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4292* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4293* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4294* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4295@end menu
4296
4297@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4298@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4299@cindex input section basics
4300An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4301by a list of section names in parentheses.
4302
4303The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4304describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4305
4306The most common input section description is to include all input
4307sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4308include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4309@smallexample
4310*(.text)
4311@end smallexample
4312@noindent
18625d54 4313Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
8f1732fc 4314@cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
18625d54
CM
4315of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4316match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4317example:
252b5132 4318@smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4319EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4320@end smallexample
4321@noindent
4322will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4323and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4324placed inside the section list, for example:
4325@smallexample
b4346c09 4326*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4327@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4328@noindent
4329The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4330two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4331more than one section, as described below.
252b5132
RH
4332
4333There are two ways to include more than one section:
4334@smallexample
4335*(.text .rdata)
4336*(.text) *(.rdata)
4337@end smallexample
4338@noindent
4339The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4340@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4341first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4342they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4343@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4344@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4345
8f1732fc
AB
4346When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4347is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4348immediately following section, for example:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4349@smallexample
4350*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4351@end smallexample
4352@noindent
4353will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4354@file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4355from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4356exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
8f1732fc 4357could be modified to:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4358@smallexample
4359*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4360@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4361@noindent
4362Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4363before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4364all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4365@smallexample
4366EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4367@end smallexample
a5bf7d4f 4368
252b5132
RH
4369You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4370You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4371needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4372@smallexample
4373data.o(.data)
4374@end smallexample
4375
ae17ab41
CM
4376To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4377of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4378
4379Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4380
4381@smallexample
4382@group
4383SECTIONS @{
4384 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4385 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4386@}
4387@end group
4388@end smallexample
4389
4390In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4391input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4392@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4393@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4394whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4395
967928e9
AM
4396You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4397matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4398with no whitespace around the colon.
4399
4400@table @samp
4401@item archive:file
4402matches file within archive
4403@item archive:
4404matches the whole archive
4405@item :file
4406matches file but not one in an archive
4407@end table
4408
4409Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4410wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4411single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4412@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4413within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4414also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4415other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4416from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4417command.
4418
252b5132
RH
4419If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4420the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4421commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4422@smallexample
4423data.o
4424@end smallexample
4425
967928e9
AM
4426When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4427and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4428characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4429name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4430did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4431though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4432@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4433the archive search path.
4434
4435@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4436@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4437@cindex input section wildcards
4438@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4439@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4440@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4441In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4442name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4443
4444The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4445pattern for the file name.
4446
4447The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4448
4449@table @samp
4450@item *
4451matches any number of characters
4452@item ?
4453matches any single character
4454@item [@var{chars}]
4455matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4456character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4457@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4458@item \
4459quotes the following character
4460@end table
4461
4462When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4463will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4464Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4465exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4466@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4467a @samp{/} character.
4468
4469File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4470specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4471does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4472
4473If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4474appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4475will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4476sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4477@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4478@smallexample
4479.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4480.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4481@end smallexample
4482
bcaa7b3e 4483@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4484Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4485in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4486this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4487pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4488@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4489into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4490
bcaa7b3e
L
4491@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4492@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4493difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4494descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4495Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4496reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4497
02ecc8e9
L
4498@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4499@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4500difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4501ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4502encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4503
bcaa7b3e
L
4504@cindex SORT
4505@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4506
4507When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4508can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4509
4510@enumerate
4511@item
4512@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4513It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4514sections have the same name.
4515@item
4516@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4517It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4518sections have the same alignment.
4519@item
c0065db7 4520@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4521treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4522@item
4523@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4524is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4525@item
4526All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4527@end enumerate
4528
4529When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4530section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4531takes precedence over the command line option.
4532
4533If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4534command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4535treated as nested sorting command.
4536
4537@enumerate
4538@item
4539@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4540@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4541@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4542@item
4543@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4544@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4545@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4546@end enumerate
4547
4548If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4549command line option will be ignored.
4550
eda680f8
L
4551@cindex SORT_NONE
4552@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4553section sorting option.
4554
252b5132
RH
4555If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4556@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4557precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4558
4559This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4560files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4561sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4562The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4563with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4564linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4565@smallexample
4566@group
4567SECTIONS @{
4568 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4569 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4570 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4571 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4572@}
4573@end group
4574@end smallexample
4575
4576@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4577@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4578@cindex common symbol placement
4579@cindex uninitialized data placement
4580A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4581file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4582linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4583named @samp{COMMON}.
4584
4585You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4586other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4587particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4588input files are placed in another section.
4589
4590In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4591@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4592@smallexample
4593.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4594@end smallexample
4595
4596@cindex scommon section
4597@cindex small common symbols
4598Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4599example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4600symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4601different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4602the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4603symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4604to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4605locations.
4606
4607@cindex [COMMON]
4608You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4609notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4610@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4611
4612@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4613@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4614@cindex KEEP
4615@cindex garbage collection
4616When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4617it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4618This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4619with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4620@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4621
4622@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4623@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4624The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4625to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4626start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4627@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4628follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4629@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4630@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4631All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4632files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4633
4634@smallexample
4635@group
4636SECTIONS @{
4637 outputa 0x10000 :
4638 @{
4639 all.o
4640 foo.o (.input1)
4641 @}
36f63dca
NC
4642@end group
4643@group
252b5132
RH
4644 outputb :
4645 @{
4646 foo.o (.input2)
4647 foo1.o (.input1)
4648 @}
36f63dca
NC
4649@end group
4650@group
252b5132
RH
4651 outputc :
4652 @{
4653 *(.input1)
4654 *(.input2)
4655 @}
4656@}
4657@end group
a1ab1d2a 4658@end smallexample
252b5132 4659
cbd0eecf
L
4660If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4661and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4662automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4663__stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4664indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4665respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4666C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4667
252b5132 4668@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4669@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4670@cindex data
4671@cindex section data
4672@cindex output section data
4673@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4674@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4675@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4676@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4677@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4678You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4679@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4680an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4681parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4682value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4683counter.
4684
4685The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4686store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4687bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4688stored.
4689
4690For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4691of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4692@smallexample
4693BYTE(1)
4694LONG(addr)
4695@end smallexample
4696
4697When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4698same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4699target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4700@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4701@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4702
4703If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4704which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4705When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4706true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4707endianness of the first input object file.
4708
36f63dca 4709Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4710between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4711@smallexample
4712SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4713@end smallexample
4714whereas this will work:
4715@smallexample
4716SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4717@end smallexample
4718
252b5132
RH
4719@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4720@cindex holes, filling
4721@cindex unspecified memory
4722You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4723current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4724otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4725gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4726with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4727necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4728point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4729than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4730different parts of an output section.
4731
4732This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4733value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4734@smallexample
563e308f 4735FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4736@end smallexample
4737
4738The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4739section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4740part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4741entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4742precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4743expression.
252b5132
RH
4744
4745@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4746@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4747There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4748commands.
4749
4750@table @code
4751@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4752@cindex input filename symbols
4753@cindex filename symbols
4754@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4755The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4756The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4757file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4758the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4759
4760This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4761normally used for any other object file format.
4762
4763@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4764@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4765@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4766@item CONSTRUCTORS
4767When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4768unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4769destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4770arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4771automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4772For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4773linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4774@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4775ignored for other object file formats.
4776
4777The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4778constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4779Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4780the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4781first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4782of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4783compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4784formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4785@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4786the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4787destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4788@code{exit}.
4789
4790For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4791arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4792addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4793and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4794linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4795runtime code expects to see.
4796
4797@smallexample
4798 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4799 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4800 *(.ctors)
4801 LONG(0)
4802 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4803 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4804 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4805 *(.dtors)
4806 LONG(0)
4807 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4808@end smallexample
4809
4810If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4811which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4812are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4813are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4814command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4815@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4816@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4817@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4818
4819Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4820and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4821need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4822scripts.
4823
4824@end table
4825
4826@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4827@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4828@cindex discarding sections
4829@cindex sections, discarding
4830@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4831The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4832This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4833may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4834@smallexample
49c13adb 4835.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4836@end smallexample
4837@noindent
4838will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4839@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4840sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4841space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4842too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4843space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4844@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4845@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4846This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4847
a0976ea4 4848The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4849on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4850symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4851the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4852section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4853
4854@cindex /DISCARD/
4855The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4856input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4857section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4858
4859@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4860@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4861@cindex output section attributes
4862We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4863like this:
0c71d759 4864
252b5132 4865@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4866@group
7e7d5768 4867@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4868 [AT(@var{lma})]
4869 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4870 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4871 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4872 @{
4873 @var{output-section-command}
4874 @var{output-section-command}
4875 @dots{}
562d3460 4876 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4877@end group
4878@end smallexample
0c71d759 4879
252b5132
RH
4880We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4881@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4882remaining section attributes.
4883
a1ab1d2a 4884@menu
252b5132
RH
4885* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4886* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4887* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4888* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4889* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4890* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4891* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4892* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4893@end menu
4894
4895@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4896@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4897Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4898parentheses. The following types are defined:
4899
4900@table @code
4901@item NOLOAD
4902The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4903loaded into memory when the program is run.
4904@item DSECT
4905@itemx COPY
4906@itemx INFO
4907@itemx OVERLAY
4908These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4909rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4910marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4911section when the program is run.
4912@end table
4913
4914@kindex NOLOAD
4915@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4916@cindex loading, preventing
4917The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4918the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4919the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4920@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4921need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4922@smallexample
4923@group
4924SECTIONS @{
4925 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4926 @dots{}
4927@}
4928@end group
4929@end smallexample
4930
4931@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4932@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4933@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4934@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4935@cindex load address
4936@cindex section load address
4937Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4938@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4939@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4940specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4941address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4942
ea5cae92
NC
4943The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4944specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4945takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4946load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4947region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4948
4949If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4950section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4951load address:
4952
4953@itemize @bullet
4954@item
4955If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4956the LMA address as well.
4957
4958@item
4959If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4960
4961@item
4962Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4963with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4964section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4965VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4966the last section in the located region.
4967
4968@item
4969If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4970that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4971
4972@item
4973If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4974section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4975@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4976
4977@cindex ROM initialized data
4978@cindex initialized data in ROM
4979This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4980example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4981called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4982@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4983even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4984uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4985defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4986counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4987
4988@smallexample
4989@group
4990SECTIONS
4991 @{
4992 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4993 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4994 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4995 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4996 .bss 0x3000 :
4997 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4998@}
4999@end group
5000@end smallexample
5001
5002The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5003this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5004the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5005how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5006script.
5007
5008@smallexample
5009@group
5010extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5011char *src = &_etext;
5012char *dst = &_data;
5013
ea5cae92
NC
5014/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5015while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 5016 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 5017
ea5cae92 5018/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
5019for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5020 *dst = 0;
5021@end group
5022@end smallexample
5023
bbf115d3
L
5024@node Forced Output Alignment
5025@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5026@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5027@cindex forcing output section alignment
5028@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 5029You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
5030alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5031intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 5032
7e7d5768
AM
5033@node Forced Input Alignment
5034@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5035@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5036@cindex forcing input section alignment
5037@cindex input section alignment
5038You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5039SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5040sections, whether larger or smaller.
5041
0c71d759
NC
5042@node Output Section Constraint
5043@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5044@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5045@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5046@cindex constraints on output sections
5047You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5048of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5049read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5050@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5051
252b5132 5052@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 5053@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
5054@kindex >@var{region}
5055@cindex section, assigning to memory region
5056@cindex memory regions and sections
5057You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5058using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5059
5060Here is a simple example:
5061@smallexample
5062@group
5063MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5064SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5065@end group
5066@end smallexample
5067
5068@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 5069@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
5070@kindex :@var{phdr}
5071@cindex section, assigning to program header
5072@cindex program headers and sections
5073You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5074using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5075one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5076assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5077@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5078linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5079
5080Here is a simple example:
5081@smallexample
5082@group
5083PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5084SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5085@end group
5086@end smallexample
5087
5088@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 5089@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
5090@kindex =@var{fillexp}
5091@cindex section fill pattern
5092@cindex fill pattern, entire section
5093You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5094@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5095(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5096within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
5097alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5098necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 5099of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
5100an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5101fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 5102other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
5103pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5104expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
5105
5106You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 5107output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
5108
5109Here is a simple example:
5110@smallexample
5111@group
563e308f 5112SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
5113@end group
5114@end smallexample
5115
5116@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 5117@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
5118@kindex OVERLAY
5119@cindex overlays
5120An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5121are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5122the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5123copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5124required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5125can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5126than another.
5127
5128Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5129@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5130output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5131command is as follows:
5132@smallexample
5133@group
5134OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5135 @{
5136 @var{secname1}
5137 @{
5138 @var{output-section-command}
5139 @var{output-section-command}
5140 @dots{}
5141 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5142 @var{secname2}
5143 @{
5144 @var{output-section-command}
5145 @var{output-section-command}
5146 @dots{}
5147 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5148 @dots{}
abc9061b 5149 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
5150@end group
5151@end smallexample
5152
5153Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5154section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5155section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 5156those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
5157except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5158sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5159
abc9061b
CC
5160The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5161the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5162
252b5132
RH
5163The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5164addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5165memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5166whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5167and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5168and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5169
56dd11f0
NC
5170If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5171references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5172the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5173sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5174@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
5175
5176For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 5177provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
5178defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5179@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5180the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5181within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5182symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5183
5184At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5185the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5186
5187Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5188@code{SECTIONS} construct.
5189@smallexample
5190@group
5191 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5192 @{
5193 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5194 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5195 @}
5196@end group
5197@end smallexample
5198@noindent
5199This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5200address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5201@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 5202following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
5203@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5204@code{__load_stop_text1}.
5205
5206C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5207like the following.
5208
5209@smallexample
5210@group
5211 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5212 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5213 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5214@end group
5215@end smallexample
5216
5217Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5218everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5219example could have been written identically as follows.
5220
5221@smallexample
5222@group
5223 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5224 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5225 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 5226 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5227 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5228 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
5229 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5230@end group
5231@end smallexample
5232
5233@node MEMORY
36f63dca 5234@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
5235@kindex MEMORY
5236@cindex memory regions
5237@cindex regions of memory
5238@cindex allocating memory
5239@cindex discontinuous memory
5240The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5241memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5242
5243The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5244memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5245may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5246can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5247set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5248regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5249around to fit into the available regions.
5250
127fcdff
AB
5251A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5252however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5253specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5254@code{MEMORY} is:
252b5132
RH
5255@smallexample
5256@group
a1ab1d2a 5257MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5258 @{
5259 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5260 @dots{}
5261 @}
5262@end group
5263@end smallexample
5264
5265The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5266region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5267Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5268with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
5269must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5270add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 5271command.
252b5132
RH
5272
5273@cindex memory region attributes
5274The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5275whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5276not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5277@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5278section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5279the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5280them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5281
5282The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5283@table @samp
5284@item R
5285Read-only section
5286@item W
5287Read/write section
5288@item X
5289Executable section
5290@item A
5291Allocatable section
5292@item I
5293Initialized section
5294@item L
5295Same as @samp{I}
5296@item !
c09e9a8c 5297Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5298@end table
5299
5300If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5301@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5302attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5303in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5304attributes.
5305
5306@kindex ORIGIN =
5307@kindex o =
5308@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5309The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5310the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5311cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5312abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5313@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5314
5315@kindex LENGTH =
5316@kindex len =
5317@kindex l =
5318The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5319region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5320be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5321@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5322
5323In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5324available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5325and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5326linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5327is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5328or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5329explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5330region.
5331
5332@smallexample
5333@group
a1ab1d2a 5334MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5335 @{
5336 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5337 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5338 @}
5339@end group
5340@end smallexample
5341
5342Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5343specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5344@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5345a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5346output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5347was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5348the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5349output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5350region, the linker will issue an error message.
5351
3ec57632 5352It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5353expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5354@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5355
5356@smallexample
5357@group
c0065db7 5358 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5359@end group
5360@end smallexample
5361
252b5132
RH
5362@node PHDRS
5363@section PHDRS Command
5364@kindex PHDRS
5365@cindex program headers
5366@cindex ELF program headers
5367@cindex program segments
5368@cindex segments, ELF
5369The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5370@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5371loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5372program with the @samp{-p} option.
5373
5374When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5375reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5376program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5377This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5378interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5379
5380The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5381in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5382precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5383the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5384not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5385
5386The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5387generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5388ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5389
5390This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5391@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5392
5393@smallexample
5394@group
5395PHDRS
5396@{
5397 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5398 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5399@}
5400@end group
5401@end smallexample
5402
5403The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5404of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5405header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5406with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5407must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5408is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5409
5410Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5411system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5412specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5413sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5414attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5415Section Phdr}.
5416
5417It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5418merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5419repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5420contain the section.
5421
5422If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5423then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5424not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5425convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5426placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5427default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5428segment at all.
5429
5430@kindex FILEHDR
5431@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5432You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5433the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5434The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5435file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5436include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5437segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5438these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5439
5440The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5441value of the keyword.
5442
5443@table @asis
5444@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5445Indicates an unused program header.
5446
5447@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5448Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5449the file.
5450
5451@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5452Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5453
5454@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5455Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5456found.
5457
5458@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5459Indicates a segment holding note information.
5460
5461@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5462A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5463ABI.
5464
5465@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5466Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5467
1a9ccd70
NC
5468@item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5469Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5470
252b5132
RH
5471@item @var{expression}
5472An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5473be used for types not defined above.
5474@end table
5475
5476You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5477in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5478@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5479Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5480output section attribute.
5481
5482The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5483which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5484explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5485an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5486header.
5487
5488Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5489headers used on a native ELF system.
5490
5491@example
5492@group
5493PHDRS
5494@{
5495 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5496 interp PT_INTERP ;
5497 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5498 data PT_LOAD ;
5499 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5500@}
5501
5502SECTIONS
5503@{
5504 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5505 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5506 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5507 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5508 @dots{}
5509 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5510 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5511 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5512 @dots{}
5513@}
5514@end group
5515@end example
5516
5517@node VERSION
5518@section VERSION Command
5519@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5520@cindex symbol versions
5521@cindex version script
5522@cindex versions of symbols
5523The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5524only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5525symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5526a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5527shared library.
5528
5529You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5530you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5531also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5532
5533The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5534@smallexample
5535VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5536@end smallexample
5537
5538The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5539Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5540version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5541version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5542version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5543scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5544library.
5545
5546The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5547examples.
5548
5549@smallexample
5550VERS_1.1 @{
5551 global:
5552 foo1;
5553 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5554 old*;
5555 original*;
5556 new*;
252b5132
RH
5557@};
5558
5559VERS_1.2 @{
5560 foo2;
5561@} VERS_1.1;
5562
5563VERS_2.0 @{
5564 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5565 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5566 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5567 "f(int, double)";
5568 @};
252b5132
RH
5569@} VERS_1.2;
5570@end smallexample
5571
5572This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5573version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5574The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5575a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5576of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5577symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5578is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5579in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5580However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5581name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5582
5583Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5584depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5585to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5586
5587Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5588depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5589and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5590
5591When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5592specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5593unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5594unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5595somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5596wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5597wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5598set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5599ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5600
5601The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5602they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5603could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5604However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5605
0f6bf451 5606Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5607in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5608symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5609won't.
5610
5611@smallexample
7c9c73be 5612@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5613@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5614
252b5132
RH
5615When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5616symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5617requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5618shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5619loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5620linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5621application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5622way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5623all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5624search for each symbol reference.
5625
5626The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5627doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5628that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5629functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5630the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5631required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5632that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5633versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5634the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5635
5636There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5637first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5638source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5639script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5640maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5641@smallexample
5642__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5643@end smallexample
5644@noindent
5645in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5646be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5647The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5648@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5649takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5650
5651The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5652function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5653an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5654version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5655linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5656
5657To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5658source file. Here is an example:
5659
5660@smallexample
5661__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5662__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5663__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5664__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5665@end smallexample
5666
5667In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5668unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5669example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5670@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5671
5672When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5673some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5674this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5675@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5676declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5677you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5678
5679If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5680within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5681(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5682specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5683
cb840a31
L
5684You can also specify the language in the version script:
5685
5686@smallexample
5687VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5688@end smallexample
5689
c0065db7 5690The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5691The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5692demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5693patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5694@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5695
86043bbb
MM
5696Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5697described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5698or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5699the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5700whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5701cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5702might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5703should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5704expect when you upgrade.
5705
252b5132
RH
5706@node Expressions
5707@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5708@cindex expressions
5709@cindex arithmetic
5710The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5711that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5712expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5713host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5714
5715You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5716
5717The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5718expressions.
5719
5720@menu
5721* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5722* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5723* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5724* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5725* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5726* Operators:: Operators
5727* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5728* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5729* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5730@end menu
5731
5732@node Constants
5733@subsection Constants
5734@cindex integer notation
5735@cindex constants in linker scripts
5736All constants are integers.
5737
5738As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5739octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5740hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5741@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5742@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5743value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5744
5745@cindex scaled integers
5746@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5747@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5748@cindex suffixes for integers
5749@cindex integer suffixes
5750In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5751constant by
5752@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5753@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5754@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5755@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5756@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5757@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5758@tex
5759${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5760@end tex
5761@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5762respectively. For example, the following
5763all refer to the same quantity:
5764
252b5132 5765@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5766_fourk_1 = 4K;
5767_fourk_2 = 4096;
5768_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5769_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5770@end smallexample
5771
8a308ae8
NC
5772Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5773conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5774
0c71d759
NC
5775@node Symbolic Constants
5776@subsection Symbolic Constants
5777@cindex symbolic constants
5778@kindex CONSTANT
5779It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5780the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5781
5782@table @code
5783@item MAXPAGESIZE
5784@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5785The target's maximum page size.
5786
5787@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5788@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5789The target's default page size.
5790@end table
5791
5792So for example:
5793
5794@smallexample
9d5777a3 5795 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5796@end smallexample
5797
5798will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5799supported by the target.
5800
252b5132
RH
5801@node Symbols
5802@subsection Symbol Names
5803@cindex symbol names
5804@cindex names
5805@cindex quoted symbol names
5806@kindex "
5807Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5808and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5809Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5810specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5811keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5812@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5813"SECTION" = 9;
5814"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5815@end smallexample
5816
5817Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5818to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5819whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5820
ecca9871
L
5821@node Orphan Sections
5822@subsection Orphan Sections
5823@cindex orphan
5824Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5825are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5826script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
a87ded7b
AB
5827output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5828in which to place the orphaned input section.
5829
5830If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5831an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5832placed at the end of that output section.
5833
5834If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5835sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5836name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5837orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5838one new output section.
5839
5840If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5841then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
e299b355
AM
5842in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5843linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5844attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5845sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
5846support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
ecca9871 5847
c005eb9e
AB
5848The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5849(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5850output sections an orphan is placed in.
5851
252b5132
RH
5852@node Location Counter
5853@subsection The Location Counter
5854@kindex .
5855@cindex dot
5856@cindex location counter
5857@cindex current output location
5858The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5859current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5860location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5861within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5862anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5863
5864@cindex holes
5865Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5866moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5867location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5868and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5869doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5870
5871@smallexample
5872SECTIONS
5873@{
5874 output :
5875 @{
5876 file1(.text)
5877 . = . + 1000;
5878 file2(.text)
5879 . += 1000;
5880 file3(.text)
563e308f 5881 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5882@}
5883@end smallexample
5884@noindent
5885In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5886located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5887followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5888@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5889@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5890specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5891
5c6bbab8
NC
5892@cindex dot inside sections
5893Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5894current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5895statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5896absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5897however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5898not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5899
5900@smallexample
5901SECTIONS
5902@{
5903 . = 0x100
5904 .text: @{
5905 *(.text)
5906 . = 0x200
5907 @}
5908 . = 0x500
5909 .data: @{
5910 *(.data)
5911 . += 0x600
5912 @}
5913@}
5914@end smallexample
5915
5916The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5917and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5918the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5919much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5920move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5921and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5922the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5923the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5924
b5666f2f
AM
5925@cindex dot outside sections
5926Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5927output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5928needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5929
5930@smallexample
5931SECTIONS
5932@{
5933 start_of_text = . ;
5934 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5935 end_of_text = . ;
5936
5937 start_of_data = . ;
5938 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5939 end_of_data = . ;
5940@}
5941@end smallexample
5942
5943If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5944not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5945between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5946should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5947blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5948the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5949sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5950statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5951special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5952place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5953as follows:
5954
5955@smallexample
5956SECTIONS
5957@{
5958 start_of_text = . ;
5959 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5960 end_of_text = . ;
5961
5962 start_of_data = . ;
5963 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5964 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5965 end_of_data = . ;
5966@}
5967@end smallexample
5968
5969This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5970@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5971placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5972assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5973a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5974section. So you could write:
5975
5976@smallexample
5977SECTIONS
5978@{
5979 start_of_text = . ;
5980 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5981 end_of_text = . ;
5982
5983 . = . ;
5984 start_of_data = . ;
5985 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5986 end_of_data = . ;
5987@}
5988@end smallexample
5989
5990Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5991@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5992
252b5132
RH
5993@need 2000
5994@node Operators
5995@subsection Operators
5996@cindex operators for arithmetic
5997@cindex arithmetic operators
5998@cindex precedence in expressions
5999The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6000the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6001@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6002@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6003@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6004@smallexample
6005precedence associativity Operators Notes
6006(highest)
60071 left ! - ~ (1)
60082 left * / %
60093 left + -
60104 left >> <<
60115 left == != > < <= >=
60126 left &
60137 left |
60148 left &&
60159 left ||
601610 right ? :
601711 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6018(lowest)
6019@end smallexample
6020Notes:
a1ab1d2a 6021(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
6022(2) @xref{Assignments}.
6023@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6024@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6025@tex
6026\vskip \baselineskip
6027%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6028\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6029\hrule
6030\halign
6031{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6032height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6033&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6034height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6035\noalign{\hrule}
6036height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6037&highest&&&&&\cr
6038% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 6039&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
6040&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6041&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6042&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6043&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6044&6&&left&&\&&\cr
6045&7&&left&&|&\cr
6046&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6047&9&&left&&||&\cr
6048&10&&right&&? :&\cr
6049&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6050&lowest&&&&&\cr
6051height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6052\hrule}
6053@end tex
6054@iftex
6055{
6056@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6057@dag@quad Prefix operators.
6058@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6059}
6060@end iftex
6061@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6062
6063@node Evaluation
6064@subsection Evaluation
6065@cindex lazy evaluation
6066@cindex expression evaluation order
6067The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6068an expression when absolutely necessary.
6069
6070The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6071address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6072regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6073as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6074
6075However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6076until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6077other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6078for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6079
6080The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6081assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6082allocation.
6083
6084Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6085@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6086
6087If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6088available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6089following
6090@smallexample
6091@group
6092SECTIONS
6093 @{
a1ab1d2a 6094 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
6095 @{ *(.text) @}
6096 @}
6097@end group
6098@end smallexample
6099@noindent
6100will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6101address}.
6102
6103@node Expression Section
6104@subsection The Section of an Expression
6105@cindex expression sections
6106@cindex absolute expressions
6107@cindex relative expressions
6108@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6109@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6110@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
6111Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6112relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6113using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6114value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6115symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6116operations.
6117
abf4be64
AM
6118Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6119section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6120address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6121@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6122functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
6123One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6124(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
6125differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6126versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6127section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6128Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
6129absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6130given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6131everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
6132
6133In the following simple example,
252b5132 6134
7542af2a
AM
6135@smallexample
6136@group
6137SECTIONS
6138 @{
6139 . = 0x100;
6140 __executable_start = 0x100;
6141 .data :
6142 @{
6143 . = 0x10;
6144 __data_start = 0x10;
6145 *(.data)
6146 @}
6147 @dots{}
6148 @}
6149@end group
6150@end smallexample
252b5132 6151
7542af2a
AM
6152both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6153address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6154@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6155section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 6156
5c3049d2
AM
6157For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6158addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
6159
6160@itemize @bullet
6161@item
c05f749e
AM
6162Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6163operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6164absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6165@item
7542af2a
AM
6166Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6167relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6168and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6169@item
c05f749e
AM
6170Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6171in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6172address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6173before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
6174@end itemize
6175
6176The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6177
6178@itemize @bullet
6179@item
6180An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6181@item
6182The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6183@item
9bc8bb33 6184The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 6185relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
94b41882
AM
6186(after above conversions) is also a number when
6187@code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6188but an absolute address otherwise.
9bc8bb33
AM
6189@item
6190The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6191relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6192section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
6193@item
6194The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6195conversions) is an absolute address.
6196@end itemize
252b5132
RH
6197
6198You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6199to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6200create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6201section @samp{.data}:
6202@smallexample
6203SECTIONS
6204 @{
6205 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6206 @}
6207@end smallexample
6208@noindent
6209If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6210@samp{.data} section.
6211
7542af2a
AM
6212Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6213particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6214
252b5132
RH
6215@node Builtin Functions
6216@subsection Builtin Functions
6217@cindex functions in expressions
6218The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6219use in linker script expressions.
6220
6221@table @code
6222@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6223@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6224@cindex expression, absolute
6225Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6226of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6227value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6228normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6229
6230@item ADDR(@var{section})
6231@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6232@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 6233Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 6234script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
6235the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6236@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6237@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6238the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
6239@smallexample
6240@group
6241SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6242 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 6243 @{
252b5132
RH
6244 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6245 @dots{}
6246 @}
6247 .output :
6248 @{
6249 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6250 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6251 @}
6252@dots{} @}
6253@end group
6254@end smallexample
6255
876f4090
NS
6256@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6257@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6258@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6259@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
6260@cindex round up location counter
6261@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
6262@cindex round up expression
6263@cindex align expression
6264Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6265to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6266doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6267arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6268expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
e0a3af22 6269equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
876f4090
NS
6270
6271Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6272next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6273variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6274input sections:
252b5132
RH
6275@smallexample
6276@group
6277SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6278 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6279 *(.data)
6280 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6281 @}
6282@dots{} @}
6283@end group
6284@end smallexample
6285@noindent
6286The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6287a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6288a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6289of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6290
6291The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6292
362c1d1a
NS
6293@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6294@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6295@cindex section alignment
6296Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6297been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6298evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6299the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6300value in that section.
6301@smallexample
6302@group
6303SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6304 .output @{
6305 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6306 @dots{}
6307 @}
6308@dots{} @}
6309@end group
6310@end smallexample
6311
252b5132
RH
6312@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6313@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6314This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6315scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6316section.
6317
2d20f7bf
JJ
6318@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6319@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6320This is equivalent to either
6321@smallexample
6322(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6323@end smallexample
6324or
6325@smallexample
fe6052e1
AM
6326(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6327 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
2d20f7bf
JJ
6328@end smallexample
6329@noindent
6330depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6331for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6332@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6333If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6334memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6335bytes in the on-disk file.
6336
6337This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6338any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6339@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6340be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6341working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6342
6343@noindent
6344Example:
6345@smallexample
6346 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6347@end smallexample
6348
6349@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6350@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6351This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6352evaluation purposes.
6353
6354@smallexample
6355 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6356@end smallexample
6357
a4f5ad88
JJ
6358@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6359@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6360This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6361@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6362When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6363does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6364@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6365boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6366it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6367@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6368padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6369section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6370
6371@smallexample
6372 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6373@end smallexample
6374
252b5132
RH
6375@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6376@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6377@cindex symbol defaults
6378Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6379defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6380return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6381default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6382shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6383the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6384existed, its value is preserved:
6385
6386@smallexample
6387@group
6388SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6389 .text : @{
6390 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6391 @dots{}
6392 @}
6393 @dots{}
6394@}
6395@end group
6396@end smallexample
6397
3ec57632
NC
6398@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6399@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6400Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6401
252b5132
RH
6402@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6403@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6404@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6405Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6406Section LMA}).
6407
2e53f7d6
NC
6408@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6409@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6410Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6411@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6412
252b5132
RH
6413@kindex MAX
6414@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6415Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6416
6417@kindex MIN
6418@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6419Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6420
6421@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6422@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6423@cindex unallocated address, next
6424Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6425This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6426use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6427output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6428
3ec57632
NC
6429@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6430@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6431Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6432
ba916c8a
MM
6433@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6434@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6435Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6436value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6437@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6438will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6439can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6440``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6441name.
6442
252b5132
RH
6443@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6444@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6445@cindex section size
6446Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6447been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6448evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6449@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6450@smallexample
6451@group
6452SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6453 .output @{
6454 .start = . ;
6455 @dots{}
6456 .end = . ;
6457 @}
6458 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6459 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6460@dots{} @}
6461@end group
6462@end smallexample
6463
6464@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6465@itemx sizeof_headers
6466@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6467@cindex header size
6468Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6469information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6470this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6471choose, to facilitate paging.
6472
6473@cindex not enough room for program headers
6474@cindex program headers, not enough room
6475When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6476@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6477number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6478addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6479additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6480room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6481the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6482script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6483you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6484command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6485@end table
6486
6487@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6488@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6489@cindex implicit linker scripts
6490If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6491an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6492linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6493linker will report an error.
6494
6495An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6496
6497Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6498assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6499commands.
6500
6501Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6502at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6503read. This can affect archive searching.
6504
6505@ifset GENERIC
6506@node Machine Dependent
6507@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6508
6509@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6510@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6511sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6512functionality are not listed.
6513
6514@menu
36f63dca
NC
6515@ifset H8300
6516* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6517@end ifset
6518@ifset I960
6519* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6520@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6521@ifset M68HC11
6522* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6523@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6524@ifset ARM
6525* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6526@end ifset
6527@ifset HPPA
6528* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6529@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6530@ifset M68K
6531* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6532@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6533@ifset MIPS
6534* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6535@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6536@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6537* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6538@end ifset
2469cfa2 6539@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6540* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6541@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6542@ifset NDS32
6543* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6544@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6545@ifset NIOSII
6546* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6547@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6548@ifset POWERPC
6549* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6550@end ifset
6551@ifset POWERPC64
6552* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6553@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6554@ifset SPU
6555* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6556@end ifset
74459f0e 6557@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6558* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6559@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6560@ifset WIN32
6561* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6562@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6563@ifset XTENSA
6564* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6565@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6566@end menu
6567@end ifset
6568
252b5132
RH
6569@ifset H8300
6570@ifclear GENERIC
6571@raisesections
6572@end ifclear
6573
6574@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6575@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6576
6577@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6578For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6579you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6580
6581@table @emph
6582@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6583@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6584@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6585targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6586program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6587respectively.
6588
6589@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6590@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6591@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6592@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6593sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6594page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6595(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6596@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6597top page of memory).
1502569c 6598
81f5558e
NC
6599@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6600indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6601displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6602the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6603@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6604whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6605range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6606
1502569c 6607@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6608@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6609biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6610which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6611page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6612(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6613@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6614the top page of memory).
6615
6616@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6617@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
661832 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6619changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6620(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6621@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6622the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6623@end table
6624
6625@ifclear GENERIC
6626@lowersections
6627@end ifclear
6628@end ifset
6629
36f63dca 6630@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6631@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6632@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6633@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6634@node Renesas
6635@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6636
c2dcd04e
NC
6637@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6638H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6639options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6640@end ifset
6641@end ifclear
6642
6643@ifset I960
6644@ifclear GENERIC
6645@raisesections
6646@end ifclear
6647
6648@node i960
6649@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6650
6651@cindex i960 support
6652
6653You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6654specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6655family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6656incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6657linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6658libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6659search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6660
6661For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6662well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6663paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6664the names
6665
6666@smallexample
6667@group
6668try
6669libtry.a
6670tryca
6671libtryca.a
6672@end group
6673@end smallexample
6674
6675@noindent
6676The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6677two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6678
6679You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6680the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6681use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6682specifies a library.
6683
6684@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6685@cindex relaxing on i960
6686@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6687you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6688@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6689them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6690instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6691instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6692target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6693not itself call any subroutines).
6694
6695@ifclear GENERIC
6696@lowersections
6697@end ifclear
6698@end ifset
6699
6700@ifset ARM
6701@ifclear GENERIC
6702@raisesections
6703@end ifclear
6704
93fd0973
SC
6705@ifset M68HC11
6706@ifclear GENERIC
6707@raisesections
6708@end ifclear
6709
6710@node M68HC11/68HC12
6711@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6712
6713@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6714
6715@subsection Linker Relaxation
6716
6717For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6718optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6719
6720@table @emph
6721@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6722@item relaxing address modes
6723@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6724targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6725program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6726respectively.
6727
6728@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6729transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6730page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6731
6732@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6733When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6734of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6735addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6736@code{bset} instructions.
6737
6738@end table
6739
6740@subsection Trampoline Generation
6741
6742@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6743@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6744For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6745call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6746will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6747trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6748case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6749point to the function trampoline.
6750
6751@ifclear GENERIC
6752@lowersections
6753@end ifclear
6754@end ifset
6755
36f63dca 6756@node ARM
3674e28a 6757@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6758
6759@cindex ARM interworking support
6760@kindex --support-old-code
6761For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6762between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6763been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6764line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6765libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6766option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6767given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6768which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6769the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6770non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6771
6772@cindex thumb entry point
6773@cindex entry point, thumb
6774@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6775The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6776@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6777But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6778branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6779executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6780
ce11ba6c
KT
6781@cindex PE import table prefixing
6782@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6783The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6784the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6785element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6786import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6787
e489d0ae
PB
6788@cindex BE8
6789@kindex --be8
6790The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
6791executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6792objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6793option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6794little-endian code.
e489d0ae 6795
3674e28a
PB
6796@cindex TARGET1
6797@kindex --target1-rel
6798@kindex --target1-abs
6799The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6800@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6801or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6802and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6803
6804@cindex TARGET2
6805@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6806The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6807@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6808meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6809@table @samp
6810@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6811@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6812@item abs
6813@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6814@item got-rel
6815@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6816@end table
6817
319850b4
JB
6818@cindex FIX_V4BX
6819@kindex --fix-v4bx
6820The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6821specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6822interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6823also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6824
6825In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6826linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6827@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6828
6829In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6830relocations are ignored.
6831
845b51d6
PB
6832@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6833@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6834Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6835relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6836
6837@smallexample
6838TST rM, #1
6839MOVEQ PC, rM
6840BX Rn
6841@end smallexample
6842
6843This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6844and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6845condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6846
33bfe774
JB
6847@cindex USE_BLX
6848@kindex --use-blx
6849The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6850BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6851situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6852code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6853each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6854
6855This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6856specify it if you are using that target.
6857
c6dd86c6
JB
6858@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6859@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6860The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6861bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6862instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6863to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6864the support code can read the intended values.
6865
6866The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6867intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6868and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6869intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6870full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6871you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6872
6873If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6874enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6875@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6876mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6877vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6878@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6879
6880If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6881potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6882such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6883first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6884instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6885the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6886are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6887
2de70689
MGD
6888@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6889@kindex --fix-arm1176
6890@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6891The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6892in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6893are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6894unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6895
9d5777a3 6896Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6897Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6898http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6899
a504d23a
LA
6900@cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6901@kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6902
6903The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6904workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6905the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6906off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6907the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6908core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6909integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6910VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6911
6912The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6913necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6914
6915The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6916@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6917STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6918linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6919@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6920
6921If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6922potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6923such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6924replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6925branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6926then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6927
6928The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6929the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6930
6931The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6932they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6933there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6934occurs.
6935
6936The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6937PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6938large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6939cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6940occurs.
6941
bf21ed78
MS
6942@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6943@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6944The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6945warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6946enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6947linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6948using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6949not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6950
6951@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6952@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6953The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6954warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6955@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6956linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6957using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6958
726150b7
NC
6959@cindex PIC_VENEER
6960@kindex --pic-veneer
6961The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6962ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6963is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6964@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6965
6966@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6967@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6968The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6969code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6970perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6971placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6972controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6973The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6974duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6975group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6976code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6977where they should be placed.
6978
6979The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6980@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6981placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6982branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6983placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6984value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6985exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6986A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6987linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6988from the input sections.
6989
6990The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6991@samp{N = +1}.
6992
1a51c1a4
NC
6993Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6994only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6995otherwise.
6996
1db37fe6
YG
6997@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6998@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6999@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7000The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7001
7002The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7003
68fcca92
JW
7004@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7005@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7006@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7007The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7008
7009Please contact ARM for further details.
7010
1db37fe6
YG
7011@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7012@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7013@cindex Merging exidx entries
7014The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7015
7016@kindex --long-plt
7017@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7018The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7019which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7020entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7021
1f56df9d
JW
7022@kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7023@cindex AArch64 rela addend
7024The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7025link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7026
4ba2ef8f
TP
7027@cindex Placement of SG veneers
7028All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
7029Its start address must be set, either with the command line option
7030@samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7031veneers in memory.
7032
54ddd295
TP
7033@kindex --cmse-implib
7034@cindex Secure gateway import library
7035The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7036specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7037secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7038executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7039
0955507f
TP
7040@kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7041@cindex Input import library
7042The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7043must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7044given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7045in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7046@samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7047library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7048library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7049for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7050specified.
7051
36f63dca
NC
7052@ifclear GENERIC
7053@lowersections
7054@end ifclear
7055@end ifset
7056
7057@ifset HPPA
7058@ifclear GENERIC
7059@raisesections
7060@end ifclear
7061
7062@node HPPA ELF32
7063@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7064@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7065@kindex --multi-subspace
7066When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7067import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7068The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7069stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7070multiple sub-spaces.
7071
7072@cindex HPPA stub grouping
7073@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7074Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7075stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7076@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7077sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7078a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7079the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7080conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7081prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7082A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7083branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7084@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7085@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7086detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7087positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7088
7089Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7090single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7091create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7092large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7093
7094@ifclear GENERIC
7095@lowersections
7096@end ifclear
7097@end ifset
7098
7fb9f789
NC
7099@ifset M68K
7100@ifclear GENERIC
7101@raisesections
7102@end ifclear
7103
7104@node M68K
7105@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7106
7107@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7108@kindex --got=@var{type}
7109The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7110The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7111@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7112the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7113@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7114entries only at non-negative offsets.
7115@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7116entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7117support such GOTs.
7118@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7119output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7120file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7121files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7122
7123@ifclear GENERIC
7124@lowersections
7125@end ifclear
7126@end ifset
7127
833794fc
MR
7128@ifset MIPS
7129@ifclear GENERIC
7130@raisesections
7131@end ifclear
7132
7133@node MIPS
7134@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7135
7136@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7137@kindex --insn32
7138@kindex --no-insn32
7139The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7140microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7141in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7142used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7143or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7144including 16-bit ones where possible.
7145
8b10b0b3
MR
7146@cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7147@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7148@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7149The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7150control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7151@samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7152relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7153calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7154relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7155instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7156or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7157the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7158
833794fc
MR
7159@ifclear GENERIC
7160@lowersections
7161@end ifclear
7162@end ifset
7163
36f63dca
NC
7164@ifset MMIX
7165@ifclear GENERIC
7166@raisesections
7167@end ifclear
7168
7169@node MMIX
7170@section @code{ld} and MMIX
7171For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7172@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7173understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7174can translate between the two formats.
7175
7176There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7177Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7178registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7179equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7180@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7181global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7182this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7183symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7184
7a2de473
HPN
7185Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7186@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7187The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7188of a section.
36f63dca
NC
7189
7190Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7191are left out from an mmo file.
7192
7193@ifclear GENERIC
7194@lowersections
7195@end ifclear
7196@end ifset
7197
7198@ifset MSP430
7199@ifclear GENERIC
7200@raisesections
7201@end ifclear
7202
7203@node MSP430
7204@section @code{ld} and MSP430
7205For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7206will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7207just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7208
7209@cindex MSP430 extra sections
7210The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7211
7212@table @code
7213@item @samp{.vectors}
7214Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7215
7216@item @samp{.bootloader}
7217Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7218in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7219
7220@item @samp{.infomem}
7221Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7222this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7223
c0065db7 7224@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
7225This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7226in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7227
7228@item @samp{.noinit}
7229Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7230
c0065db7 7231The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
7232@end table
7233
7234@ifclear GENERIC
7235@lowersections
7236@end ifclear
7237@end ifset
7238
35c08157
KLC
7239@ifset NDS32
7240@ifclear GENERIC
7241@raisesections
7242@end ifclear
7243
7244@node NDS32
7245@section @code{ld} and NDS32
7246@kindex relaxing on NDS32
7247For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7248relaxes objects according to these options.
7249
7250@table @code
7251@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7252Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7253
7254@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7255Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7256
7257@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7258Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7259
7260@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7261Export the EX9 table after linking.
7262
7263@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7264Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7265
7266@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7267Update the existing EX9 table.
7268
7269@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7270Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7271
7272@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7273Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7274
7275@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7276Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7277
7278@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7279Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7280@end table
7281
7282@ifclear GENERIC
7283@lowersections
7284@end ifclear
7285@end ifset
7286
78058a5e
SL
7287@ifset NIOSII
7288@ifclear GENERIC
7289@raisesections
7290@end ifclear
7291
7292@node Nios II
7293@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7294@cindex Nios II call relaxation
7295@kindex --relax on Nios II
7296
7297Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7298transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7299which may result in @command{ld} giving
7300@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7301The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7302trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7303outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7304trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7305be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7306larger than 256MB.
7307
7308The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7309is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7310@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7311locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7312source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7313register as a temporary.
7314
7315Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7316relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7317option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7318
7319@ifclear GENERIC
7320@lowersections
7321@end ifclear
7322@end ifset
7323
2a60a7a8
AM
7324@ifset POWERPC
7325@ifclear GENERIC
7326@raisesections
7327@end ifclear
7328
7329@node PowerPC ELF32
7330@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7331@cindex PowerPC long branches
7332@kindex --relax on PowerPC
7333Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7334displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7335@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7336@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7337the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7338section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
7339section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7340@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7341both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7342considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
7343
7344@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7345@table @option
7346@cindex PowerPC PLT
7347@kindex --bss-plt
7348@item --bss-plt
7349Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7350generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7351the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7352writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7353@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7354PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7355compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7356BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7357
016687f8
AM
7358@kindex --secure-plt
7359@item --secure-plt
7360@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7361@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7362when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7363layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7364style BSS PLT.
7365
2a60a7a8
AM
7366@cindex PowerPC GOT
7367@kindex --sdata-got
7368@item --sdata-got
7369The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7370sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7371@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7372section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7373@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7374@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7375@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7376@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7377PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7378pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7379GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7380really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7381
7382@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7383@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7384@item --emit-stub-syms
7385This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7386symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7387
7388@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7389@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7390@item --no-tls-optimize
7391PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7392sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7393disable the optimization.
7394@end table
7395
7396@ifclear GENERIC
7397@lowersections
7398@end ifclear
7399@end ifset
7400
7401@ifset POWERPC64
7402@ifclear GENERIC
7403@raisesections
7404@end ifclear
7405
7406@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7407@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7408
7409@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7410@table @option
7411@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7412@kindex --stub-group-size
7413@item --stub-group-size
7414Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7415by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7416@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7417sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7418a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7419the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7420conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7421prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7422A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7423branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7424@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7425@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7426detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7427positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7428
7429Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7430single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7431create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7432large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7433
7434@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7435@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7436@item --emit-stub-syms
7437This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7438symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7439
7440@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7441@kindex --dotsyms
7442@kindex --no-dotsyms
95421fb9
AM
7443@item --dotsyms
7444@itemx --no-dotsyms
2a60a7a8
AM
7445These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7446in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7447function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7448code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7449properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7450to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7451@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7452dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7453feature.
7454
7ae4ea7d
AM
7455@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7456@kindex --save-restore-funcs
7457@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
95421fb9
AM
7458@item --save-restore-funcs
7459@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7ae4ea7d
AM
7460These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7461provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7462@samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7463function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7464link.
7465
2a60a7a8
AM
7466@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7467@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7468@item --no-tls-optimize
7469PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7470sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7471disable the optimization.
7472
7c9cf415
AM
7473@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7474@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7475@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
95421fb9
AM
7476@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7477@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7c9cf415
AM
7478These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7479stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7480an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7481@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7482stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7483option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7484Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7485slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7486application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7487normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7488
2a60a7a8
AM
7489@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7490@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7491@item --no-opd-optimize
7492PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7493corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7494the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7495Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7496
7497@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7498@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7499@item --non-overlapping-opd
7500Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7501@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7502the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7503entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7504
7505@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7506@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7507@item --no-toc-optimize
7508PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7509entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7510reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7511marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7512marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7513relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7514unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7515reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7516discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7517reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7518code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7519optimization.
7520
7521@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7522@kindex --no-multi-toc
7523@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7524If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7525@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7526where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7527entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7528total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7529grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7530TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7531calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7532help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
753364K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7534Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7535
7536@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7537@kindex --no-toc-sort
7538@item --no-toc-sort
7539By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7540happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7541placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7542with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7543referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7544@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7545results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7546off this feature.
7547
7548@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7549@kindex --plt-align
7550@kindex --no-plt-align
7551@item --plt-align
7552@itemx --no-plt-align
7553Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
e05fa0ba
AM
7554padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7555specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7556that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7557stubs are packed tightly.
794e51c0
AM
7558
7559@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7560@kindex --plt-static-chain
7561@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7562@item --plt-static-chain
7563@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7564Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7565chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7566chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7567
7568@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7569@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7570@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7571@item --plt-thread-safe
7572@itemx --no-thread-safe
7573With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7574lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7575another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7576order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7577memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7578barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7579looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7580seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7581default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
7582@end table
7583
7584@ifclear GENERIC
7585@lowersections
7586@end ifclear
7587@end ifset
7588
49fa1e15
AM
7589@ifset SPU
7590@ifclear GENERIC
7591@raisesections
7592@end ifclear
7593
7594@node SPU ELF
7595@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7596
7597@cindex SPU ELF options
7598@table @option
7599
7600@cindex SPU plugins
7601@kindex --plugin
7602@item --plugin
7603This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7604
7605@cindex SPU overlays
7606@kindex --no-overlays
7607@item --no-overlays
7608Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7609regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7610@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7611turns off all this special overlay handling.
7612
7613@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7614@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7615@item --emit-stub-syms
7616This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7617symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7618
7619@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7620@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7621@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7622This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7623function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7624on calls to non-overlay regions.
7625
7626@cindex SPU local store size
7627@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7628@item --local-store=lo:hi
7629@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7630the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7631range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7632
c0065db7 7633@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7634@kindex --stack-analysis
7635@item --stack-analysis
7636SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7637unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7638under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7639@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7640@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7641determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7642for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7643for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7644for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7645find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7646and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7647under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7648dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7649is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7650and calls will be given.
7651
c0065db7 7652@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7653@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7654@item --emit-stack-syms
7655This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7656in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7657These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7658functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7659functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7660such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7661The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7662@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7663@end table
7664
7665@ifclear GENERIC
7666@lowersections
7667@end ifclear
7668@end ifset
7669
36f63dca
NC
7670@ifset TICOFF
7671@ifclear GENERIC
7672@raisesections
7673@end ifclear
7674
7675@node TI COFF
7676@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7677@cindex TI COFF versions
7678@kindex --format=@var{version}
7679The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7680TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7681also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7682format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7683header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7684
7685@ifclear GENERIC
7686@lowersections
7687@end ifclear
7688@end ifset
7689
2ca22b03
NC
7690@ifset WIN32
7691@ifclear GENERIC
7692@raisesections
7693@end ifclear
7694
7695@node WIN32
7696@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7697
c0065db7 7698This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 7699See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 7700command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7701
7702@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7703@cindex import libraries
7704@item import libraries
69da35b5 7705The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7706libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7707regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7708archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
7709support for creating such libraries provided with the
7710@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7711
c0065db7
RM
7712@item exporting DLL symbols
7713@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7714The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7715
7716@table @emph
7717@item using auto-export functionality
7718@cindex using auto-export functionality
7719By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7720which is controlled by the following command line options:
7721
0a5d968e
NC
7722@itemize
7723@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7724@item --exclude-symbols
7725@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7726@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7727@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7728@end itemize
7729
09e2aba4
DK
7730When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7731(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7732symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7733often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7734private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7735options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7736exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7737final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7738
7739If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7740command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7741if either of the following are true:
7742
7743@itemize
7744@item A DEF file is used.
7745@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7746@end itemize
dc8465bf 7747
c0065db7
RM
7748@item using a DEF file
7749@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7750Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7751an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7752exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7753name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7754command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7755
7756@example
7757gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7758@end example
7759
0a5d968e
NC
7760Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7761@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7762
dc8465bf
NC
7763Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7764
7765@example
4b5bd4e7 7766LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7767
7768EXPORTS
7769foo
7770bar
7771_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7772another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7773var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7774doo = foo == foo2
7775eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7776@end example
dc8465bf 7777
7fcab871 7778This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7779symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7780alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7781by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7782@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7783@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7784export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7785in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7786symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7787
6b31ad16
DS
7788The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7789name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7790the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7791
b45619c0
NC
7792When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7793library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7794@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7795executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7796
7797With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7798specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7799non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7800
7801If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7802or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7803filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7804
4b5bd4e7
DS
7805The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7806
7807@example
7808EXPORTS
7809 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7810 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7811 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7812@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7813
7814Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7815@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7816@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7817@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7818Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7819@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7820string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7821
7822The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7823
7824@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7825will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7826by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7827linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7828library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7829
7830@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7831The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7832the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7833@code{*_imp__foo}).
7834
7835@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7836well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7837read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7838variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7839the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7840extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7841application will behave unexpectedly.
7842
7843@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7844it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7845symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7846API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7847the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7848
4b5bd4e7
DS
7849See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7850other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7851
7852@cindex creating a DEF file
7853While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7854with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7855
7856@item Using decorations
7857@cindex Using decorations
7858Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7859itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7860declared as:
7861
7862@example
7863__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7864__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7865@end example
7866
7867All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7868any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7869this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7870the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7871
7872Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7873decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7874instead:
7875
7876@example
7877__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7878__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7879@end example
7880
c0065db7
RM
7881This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7882when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7883variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7884code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7885of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7886omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7887@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7888information.
c0065db7 7889@end table
dc8465bf 7890
2ca22b03
NC
7891@cindex automatic data imports
7892@item automatic data imports
7893The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7894by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7895compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7896issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7897code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7898c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7899initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7900decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7901platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7902command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7903The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7904suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7905trigger the feature's use.
7906
c0065db7 7907auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7908additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7909
c0065db7 7910"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7911documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7912
c0065db7
RM
7913The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7914occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7915One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7916below.
7917
7918@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7919For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7920object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7921offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7922field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7923in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7924without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7925The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7926references.
7927
c0065db7
RM
7928The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7929be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7930themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7931runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7932compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7933support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7934run without error on an older system.
7935
c0065db7
RM
7936@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7937enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7938
7939@cindex direct linking to a dll
7940@item direct linking to a dll
7941The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7942including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7943libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7944traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7945libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7946function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7947though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7948storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7949tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7950large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7951
c0065db7 7952Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7953@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7954of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7955perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7956select the dll instead of an import library.
7957
2ca22b03 7958
69da35b5
NC
7959For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7960to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7961
7962@example
45e948fe
NC
7963libxxx.dll.a
7964xxx.dll.a
7965libxxx.a
7966xxx.lib
69da35b5 7967cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7968libxxx.dll
7969xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7970@end example
7971
69da35b5
NC
7972before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7973
c0065db7
RM
7974(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7975where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7976@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7977file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7978@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7979
c0065db7
RM
7980Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7981@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7982was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7983various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7984could coexist on the same machine.
7985
2ca22b03
NC
7986The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7987applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7988libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7989
7990@example
7991bin/
7992 cygxxx.dll
7993lib/
7994 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7995 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7996@end example
7997
c0065db7
RM
7998Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7999done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
8000
80011. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8002@example
8003gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8004@end example
2ca22b03 8005
69da35b5
NC
8006However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8007(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8008@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8009not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8010
2ca22b03
NC
80112. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8012directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8013should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8014making the app/dll.
8015
8016@example
8017ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 8018@end example
2ca22b03
NC
8019
8020Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8021
8022@example
8023gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8024@end example
69da35b5
NC
8025
8026This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8027perfectly legal
8028
8029@example
8030bin/
8031 cygxxx-5.dll
8032lib/
c0065db7 8033 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
8034@end example
8035
dc8465bf 8036Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
8037even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8038@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8039
8040Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 8041wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
8042
80431. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8044work with auto-imported data.
8045
dc8465bf
NC
80462. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8047import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8048symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8049for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8050possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 8051
45e948fe
NC
80523. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8053critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8054in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8055stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8056
69da35b5 8057So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
8058true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8059a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8060binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
8061massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8062requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8063will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 8064
c0065db7 8065@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 8066@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
8067@item adding additional names
8068Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
8069A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8070exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8071when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 8072import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 8073
c0065db7 8074@example
dc8465bf
NC
8075LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8076
8077EXPORTS
c0065db7 8078foo
dc8465bf 8079_foo = foo
c0065db7 8080@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8081
8082The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8083
8084Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8085source code using the "weak" attribute:
8086
c0065db7
RM
8087@example
8088void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 8089void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 8090@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8091
8092See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8093symbols.
8094
8095@item renaming symbols
8096Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 8097kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
8098@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8099DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 8100created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 8101
c0065db7 8102@example
dc8465bf
NC
8103LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8104
8105EXPORTS
8106_foo = foo
c0065db7 8107@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8108
8109The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8110@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 8111@end table
dc8465bf 8112
0a5d968e 8113Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 8114unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 8115If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
8116@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8117that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8118@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8119renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8120to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8121the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8122In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 8123which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
8124
8125@cindex weak externals
8126@item weak externals
8127The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8128weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8129defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8130are three variants of weak externals:
8131@itemize
8132@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8133called lazy externals.
8134@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8135This form is not presently implemented.
8136@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8137implemented.
8138@end itemize
8139As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8140are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8141uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
8142
8143@cindex aligned common symbols
8144@item aligned common symbols
8145As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8146desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8147the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8148carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8149by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8150tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8151but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8152warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 8153
2ca22b03
NC
8154@end table
8155
8156@ifclear GENERIC
8157@lowersections
8158@end ifclear
8159@end ifset
8160
e0001a05
NC
8161@ifset XTENSA
8162@ifclear GENERIC
8163@raisesections
8164@end ifclear
8165
8166@node Xtensa
8167@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8168
8169@cindex Xtensa processors
8170The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8171@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8172specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8173keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8174example, with the command:
8175
8176@smallexample
8177SECTIONS
8178@{
8179 .text : @{
8180 *(.literal .text)
8181 @}
8182@}
8183@end smallexample
8184
8185@noindent
8186@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8187and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8188literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8189interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8190group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8191files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8192and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 8193
43cd72b9 8194@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 8195@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
8196Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8197provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8198is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8199literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8200will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8201location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8202the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8203unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8204@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8205range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8206
8207For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8208to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8209instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8210instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8211instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8212@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8213hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8214By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8215switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8216density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8217instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8218performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8219linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8220a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8221
8222The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8223control the linker:
8224
8225@cindex Xtensa options
8226@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
8227@item --size-opt
8228When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8229more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8230no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8231alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8232preserve the correctness of the code.
8233@end table
e0001a05
NC
8234
8235@ifclear GENERIC
8236@lowersections
8237@end ifclear
8238@end ifset
8239
252b5132
RH
8240@ifclear SingleFormat
8241@node BFD
8242@chapter BFD
8243
8244@cindex back end
8245@cindex object file management
8246@cindex object formats available
8247@kindex objdump -i
8248The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8249These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8250object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8251format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8252it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8253associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8254object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8255(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8256list all the formats available for your configuration.
8257
8258@cindex BFD requirements
8259@cindex requirements for BFD
8260As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8261several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8262BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8263formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8264been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8265BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8266may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8267
8268One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8269mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8270useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8271conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8272
8273@menu
8274* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8275@end menu
8276
8277@node BFD outline
36f63dca 8278@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
8279@cindex opening object files
8280@include bfdsumm.texi
8281@end ifclear
8282
8283@node Reporting Bugs
8284@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
8285@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8286@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 8287
ff5dcc92 8288Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
8289
8290Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8291it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 8292to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 8293work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 8294@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8295
8296In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8297information that enables us to fix the bug.
8298
8299@menu
8300* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8301* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8302@end menu
8303
8304@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 8305@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
8306@cindex bug criteria
8307
8308If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8309
8310@itemize @bullet
8311@cindex fatal signal
8312@cindex linker crash
8313@cindex crash of linker
8314@item
8315If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 8316@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
8317
8318@cindex error on valid input
8319@item
ff5dcc92 8320If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
8321
8322@cindex invalid input
8323@item
ff5dcc92 8324If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
8325may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8326object files are correct.
8327
8328@item
8329If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 8330improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
8331@end itemize
8332
8333@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 8334@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 8335@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 8336@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
8337
8338A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 8339products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
8340recommend you contact that organization first.
8341
8342You can find contact information for many support companies and
8343individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8344distribution.
8345
ad22bfe8 8346@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 8347Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
8348@value{BUGURL}.
8349@end ifset
252b5132
RH
8350
8351The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8352@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8353fact or leave it out, state it!
8354
8355Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8356problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
8357assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8358matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8359the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8360location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8361were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8362into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8363specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 8364and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
8365
8366Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8367the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8368on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
8369
8370Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
8371bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8372respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8373You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
8374
8375To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8376
8377@itemize @bullet
8378@item
ff5dcc92 8379The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
8380the @samp{--version} argument.
8381
8382Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 8383the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8384
8385@item
ff5dcc92 8386Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
8387patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8388
8389@item
8390The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8391version number.
8392
8393@item
ff5dcc92 8394What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
8395``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8396
8397@item
8398The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8399observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8400list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8401sufficient.
8402
8403If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8404and then we might not encounter the bug.
8405
8406@item
8407A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8408bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8409provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8410bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8411state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8412requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8413we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8414attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8415
8416If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8417@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8418object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8419@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8420how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8421
8422@item
8423A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8424incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8425
ff5dcc92 8426Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8427will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8428not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8429a chance to make a mistake.
8430
8431Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8432say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8433copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8434C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8435and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8436fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8437you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8438any conclusion from our observations.
8439
8440@item
ff5dcc92 8441If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8442diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8443@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8444If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8445context, not by line number.
8446
8447The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8448sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8449@end itemize
8450
8451Here are some things that are not necessary:
8452
8453@itemize @bullet
8454@item
8455A description of the envelope of the bug.
8456
8457Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8458which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8459changes will not affect it.
8460
8461This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8462will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8463with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8464We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8465
8466Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8467of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8468output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8469less time, and so on.
8470
8471However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8472report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8473
8474@item
8475A patch for the bug.
8476
8477A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8478the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8479a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8480to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8481
ff5dcc92 8482Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8483construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8484through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8485able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8486fixed.
8487
8488And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8489patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8490help us to understand.
8491
8492@item
8493A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8494
8495Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8496things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8497@end itemize
8498
8499@node MRI
8500@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8501@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8502To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8503linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8504alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8505described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8506simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8507@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8508linker commands; these commands are described here.
8509
8510In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8511file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8512features to make use of them.
8513
8514You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8515@samp{-c} command-line option.
8516
8517Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8518command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8519blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8520MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8521issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8522
8523Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8524
8525You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8526lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8527The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8528
8529@table @code
8530@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8531@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8532@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8533Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8534the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8535@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8536your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8537script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8538commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8539input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8540@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8541
8542@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8543@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8544Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8545in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8546
8547@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8548
8549@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8550@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8551Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8552@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8553
8554@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8555@item BASE @var{expression}
8556Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8557absolute addresses) in the output file.
8558
8559@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8560@item CHIP @var{expression}
8561@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8562This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8563
8564@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8565@item END
8566This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8567
8568@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8569@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8570Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 8571language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
8572
8573@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 8574@item
252b5132
RH
8575S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8576
8577@item
8578IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8579
8580@item
8581COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8582@samp{COFF}
8583@end enumerate
8584
8585@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8586@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8587Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8588@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8589
8590The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8591same line, with no change in its effect.
8592
8593@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8594@item LOAD @var{filename}
8595@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8596Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8597same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8598command line.
8599
8600@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8601@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8602@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8603MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8604option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8605
8606@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8607@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8608@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8609Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8610order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8611script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8612sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8613file, in the order specified.
8614
8615@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8616@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8617@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8618@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8619Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8620@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8621
8622@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8623@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8624@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8625@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8626You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8627specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8628If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8629@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8630@end table
8631
793c5807
NC
8632@node GNU Free Documentation License
8633@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8634@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8635
370b66a1
CD
8636@node LD Index
8637@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8638
8639@printindex cp
8640
8641@tex
7ca01ed9 8642% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8643% meantime:
8644\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8645\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8646\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8647\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8648\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8649\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8650\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8651\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8652\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8653% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8654@end tex
8655
252b5132 8656@bye
This page took 1.344705 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.